WO2019102771A1 - Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, and method for producing wiring line - Google Patents

Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, and method for producing wiring line Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019102771A1
WO2019102771A1 PCT/JP2018/039375 JP2018039375W WO2019102771A1 WO 2019102771 A1 WO2019102771 A1 WO 2019102771A1 JP 2018039375 W JP2018039375 W JP 2018039375W WO 2019102771 A1 WO2019102771 A1 WO 2019102771A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
photosensitive
layer
photosensitive layer
group
transfer material
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2018/039375
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
一真 両角
藤本 進二
漢那 慎一
壮二 石坂
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to JP2019556140A priority Critical patent/JP6999693B2/en
Priority to CN201880075097.9A priority patent/CN111386498A/en
Publication of WO2019102771A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019102771A1/en
Priority to JP2021201967A priority patent/JP2022043153A/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/022Quinonediazides
    • G03F7/023Macromolecular quinonediazides; Macromolecular additives, e.g. binders
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/027Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/039Macromolecular compounds which are photodegradable, e.g. positive electron resists
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/26Processing photosensitive materials; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/40Treatment after imagewise removal, e.g. baking
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/26Processing photosensitive materials; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/42Stripping or agents therefor
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to a photosensitive transfer material, a resin pattern manufacturing method, and a wiring manufacturing method.
  • a display device organic electroluminescence (EL) display device, liquid crystal display device, etc.
  • a touch panel such as a capacitance type input device
  • an electrode pattern corresponding to a sensor of a visual recognition portion, wiring of peripheral wiring portions and extraction wiring portions And the like are provided inside the touch panel.
  • a layer of a photosensitive resin composition provided on an arbitrary substrate using a photosensitive transfer material since the number of steps for obtaining a required pattern shape is small.
  • a method of developing after exposure through a mask having a desired pattern is widely used.
  • JP-A-2016-224161 a laminate having (a) a photosensitive layer and (b) a resin layer formed on a substrate is exposed, heat-treated, and developed.
  • a method of forming a resist pattern is disclosed which includes the steps of JP-A 2014-74764 discloses a photosensitive element comprising a support film and a photosensitive layer formed on the support film, wherein the support film is opposite to the surface in contact with the photosensitive layer.
  • a photosensitive element having a self-healing layer on the surface, wherein the photosensitive layer comprises (A) a binder polymer, (B) a photopolymerizable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, and (C) a photopolymerization initiator. It is done.
  • the problem to be solved by the embodiment of the present invention is to provide a photosensitive transfer material which is excellent in the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer.
  • Another problem to be solved by another embodiment of the present invention is to provide a resin pattern manufacturing method and a wiring manufacturing method using the photosensitive transfer material.
  • Means for solving the above problems include the following aspects.
  • a photosensitive transfer material comprising a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive layer in this order, wherein the intermediate layer contains a binder and particles having an arithmetic average particle diameter of 400 nm or less.
  • ⁇ 3> The photosensitive transfer material according to ⁇ 1> or ⁇ 2>, wherein an average film thickness of the intermediate layer is 0.3 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m.
  • ⁇ 4> The particles of the above ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 3>, wherein the particles contained in the intermediate layer are oxide particles of at least one element selected from the group consisting of Si, Ti and Zr, or organic particles
  • ⁇ 5> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of the above ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 4>, wherein the photosensitive layer contains a binder and a photoacid generator.
  • ⁇ 6> The photosensitive transfer material according to ⁇ 5>, wherein the binder contained in the photosensitive layer contains a binder having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group.
  • ⁇ 7> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of the above ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 4>, wherein the photosensitive layer contains a binder having an acid group, a polymerizable compound, and a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the binder contained in the intermediate layer contains a modified cellulose resin.
  • the intermediate layer has two or more layers.
  • ⁇ 10> The photosensitive transfer material according to the above ⁇ 9>, wherein particles having an arithmetic average particle diameter of 400 nm or less are contained only in the layer closest to the photosensitive layer among two or more layers in the intermediate layer.
  • a method for producing a wiring comprising the step of peeling off the temporary support after the step of bonding to a body and before the step of developing the photosensitive layer.
  • a photosensitive transfer material which is excellent in the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer. Further, according to another embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a resin pattern manufacturing method and a wiring manufacturing method using the photosensitive transfer material.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic view showing an example of a layer configuration of a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic view showing a pattern A.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic view showing a pattern B.
  • symbol may be abbreviate
  • a numerical range represented using “to” means a range including numerical values described before and after “to” as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
  • (meth) acryl represents both or any of acrylic and methacryl
  • (meth) acrylate” represents both or any of acrylate and a methacrylate.
  • the amount of each component in the composition is the total of a plurality of corresponding substances present in the composition unless a plurality of substances corresponding to each component are present in the composition. Means quantity.
  • the term "process” is included in the term if the intended purpose of the process is achieved, even if it can not be clearly distinguished from other processes, as well as independent processes.
  • groups (atomic groups) in the present specification notations not describing substitution and non-substitution include those having no substituent as well as those having a substituent.
  • the "alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • the chemical structural formula in this specification may be described by the simplified structural formula which abbreviate
  • weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) in the present disclosure use columns of TSKgel GMHxL, TSKgel G4000HxL, and TSKgel G2000HxL (all are trade names manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) unless otherwise noted.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive layer in this order, and the intermediate layer contains a binder and particles having an arithmetic average particle diameter of 400 nm or less. .
  • the photosensitive transfer material into a layer structure of temporary support / interlayer / photosensitive layer (/ cover film).
  • the temporary support can be peeled off and then the mask can be contact exposed (the photosensitive layer and the mask are not in contact) or the photosensitive layer.
  • a photosensitive layer having a uniform film thickness can be formed without being affected by irregularities on the surface of the temporary support or foreign substances at the time of formation.
  • the temporary support when the temporary support is peeled off, it may be peeled off between the temporary support and the intermediate layer, or may be peeled off between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer, and the interface to be peeled is not stable.
  • the inventors have found that there is a problem. That is, it is considered that the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer may be insufficient.
  • the present inventors added a filler to the intermediate layer to increase the contact area with the photosensitive layer at the layer interface and to increase the adhesion by physical action. They found it. By doing this, it is possible to stably separate between the temporary support and the intermediate layer.
  • the present inventors have found that the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer is excellent by using the photosensitive transfer material having the above configuration.
  • the mechanism of manifestation of the above-mentioned effects is unclear, as described above, the inclusion of particles having an arithmetic average particle diameter of 400 nm or less in the intermediate layer increases the contact area with the photosensitive layer at the layer interface, The present inventors estimate that the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer is improved.
  • the arithmetic average particle diameter of the particles is 400 nm or less, the contact area with the photosensitive layer at the layer interface is further increased, and the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer is improved by the present inventors. Is estimating.
  • FIG. 1 schematically shows an example of the layer configuration of a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure.
  • a temporary support 10 In the photosensitive transfer material 100 shown in FIG. 1, a temporary support 10, an intermediate layer 12, a photosensitive layer 14, and a cover film 16 are laminated in this order.
  • the intermediate layer 12 contains a binder and particles having an arithmetic average particle diameter of 400 nm or less.
  • constituent materials and the like of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure will be described.
  • the temporary support is a support that supports the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer and can be peeled off from the intermediate layer.
  • the temporary support used in the present disclosure preferably has light transmittance from the viewpoint of being able to expose the photosensitive layer through the temporary support when the photosensitive layer is subjected to pattern exposure. Having light transmission means that the transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is 50% or more, and the transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is a viewpoint of improving exposure sensitivity. Therefore, 60% or more is preferable, and 70% or more is more preferable.
  • permeability the method of measuring using Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd. product MCPD Series is mentioned.
  • a resin film is especially preferable from a viewpoint of intensity
  • a resin film a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, a polycarbonate film etc. are mentioned. Among them, biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is particularly preferable.
  • the thickness of the temporary support is not particularly limited, and is preferably in the range of 5 ⁇ m to 200 ⁇ m, and more preferably in the range of 10 ⁇ m to 150 ⁇ m in terms of handleability, versatility and the like.
  • the thickness of the temporary support can be selected according to the material from the viewpoints of strength as a support, flexibility required for bonding to a wiring formation substrate, light transmittance required in the first exposure step, and the like. Just do it.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure contains a binder and particles having an arithmetic average particle diameter of 400 nm or less.
  • the binder is preferably a water-soluble or alkali-soluble binder, and more preferably a water-soluble or alkali-soluble polymer.
  • water-soluble means that the solubility in water of pH 7.0 at 25 ° C. is 0.1% by mass or more
  • alkali-soluble means that pH 8.5 at 25 ° C. It means that the solubility to 5 or more alkaline aqueous solution is 0.1 mass% or more.
  • the above-mentioned "water-soluble or alkali-soluble” may be either water-soluble or alkali-soluble, or both water-soluble and alkali-soluble.
  • Novolak resin such as mixed formaldehyde resin, pyrogallol acetone resin, polyhydroxystyrene resin, modified cellulose resin, acrylic resin having hydroxy group (for example, homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate), Starches, glycogens, chitins, agaroses, carrageenans, pullulan, gum arabic, soy gum, polyamide resin, epoxy resin, polyacetal resin, acrylic resin, polystyrene resin, Urethane resins, polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl formal, polyamide resin, polyester resin, polyethyleneimine, polyallylamine,
  • Novolak resin such as mixed formaldehyde resin, pyrogallol acetone resin, polyhydroxystyrene resin, modified cellulose resin, acrylic resin having hydroxy group (for example, homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate), Starches, glycogens, chitins,
  • the binder is at least one resin selected from the group consisting of novolak resins, modified cellulose resins, and acrylic resins having a hydroxy group from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer and patternability. It is preferable that the resin is at least one resin selected from the group consisting of a modified cellulose resin and an acrylic resin having a hydroxy group, more preferably a modified cellulose resin. Further, as the modified cellulose resin, a hydroxyalkylated cellulose is preferable from the viewpoint of the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer and the pattern forming property.
  • hydroxyalkylated cellulose examples include hydroxymethylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, polyhydroxyethylated cellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, glyoxalized hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose phthalate and the like.
  • at least one resin selected from the group consisting of hydroxypropyl cellulose and hydroxypropyl methylcellulose is preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer and patternability, and it is preferable to be hydroxypropyl methylcellulose. More preferable.
  • the binder is preferably at least one resin selected from the group consisting of polyvinyl alcohol and polyvinyl formal from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer, and polyvinyl alcohol is more preferable. preferable.
  • the weight-average molecular weight of the binder is preferably 1,000 or more, from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer, patternability, solubility in a developer after exposure, and transferability. It is preferably ⁇ 100,000 and more preferably 10,000 to 50,000.
  • the intermediate layer may contain one kind of binder alone, or may contain two or more kinds of binders.
  • the content of the binder in the intermediate layer is 1 mass to the total mass of the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer, the patternability, the solubility in a developer after exposure and the transferability. % Or more and 99% by mass or less is preferable, 1% by mass or more and 90% by mass or less is more preferable, 2% by mass or more and 80% by mass or less is more preferable, and 3% by mass or more and 70% by mass or less Is particularly preferred.
  • the intermediate layer contains particles having an arithmetic mean particle size of 400 nm or less.
  • the particles are preferably metal oxide particles or organic particles from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer, and oxide particles of an element selected from the group consisting of Si, Ti and Zr Or, organic particles are more preferable.
  • the metal of the metal oxide particles in the present disclosure includes semimetals such as B, Si, Ge, As, Sb, and Te.
  • metal oxide particles Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Sc, Y, La, Ce, Gd, Tb, Dy, Yb, Lu, Ti, Zr, Hf, Nb, Mo, W, Zn, B And oxide particles containing atoms such as Al, Si, Ge, Sn, Pb, Sb, Bi, Te, etc. are preferable, and silica, titanium oxide, titanium composite oxide, zinc oxide, zirconium oxide, indium / tin oxide, or Antimony / tin oxide is more preferable, silica, titanium oxide, titanium complex oxide or zirconium oxide is more preferable, and silica, titanium oxide or zirconium oxide is particularly preferable.
  • organic particles organic resin particles are preferably mentioned.
  • organic resin particles include homopolymers and copolymers of acrylic acid monomers such as acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, acrylic acid esters and methacrylic acid esters, and cellulose polymers such as nitrocellulose, methyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate , Polyethylene, polypropylene, polystyrene, vinyl chloride copolymer, vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate copolymer, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, polyvinyl butyral, copolymer of vinyl polymer such as polyvinyl alcohol and vinyl compound, polyester, polyurethane, polyamide Condensation polymers, rubber-based thermoplastic polymers such as butadiene-styrene copolymers, polymers obtained by polymerizing and crosslinking photopolymerizable or thermally polymerizable compounds such as epoxy compounds, Min compounds and the like.
  • acrylic acid monomers such as acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, acrylic acid esters and methacrylic acid esters
  • acrylic resin particles are preferably mentioned as the organic particles, and polymethyl methacrylate particles are more preferably mentioned.
  • these particles can also be treated with an organic material or an inorganic material on the surface to impart dispersion stability.
  • the particles are preferably particles having a hydrophilic surface.
  • the surface of the particles having a hydrophobic surface is subjected to a hydrophilization treatment, and the like.
  • the arithmetic mean particle diameter of the above particles is 400 nm or less, preferably 250 nm or less, more preferably 200 nm or less, and 150 nm or less from the viewpoint of the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer. More preferably, it is particularly preferably 10 nm to 150 nm.
  • the method of measuring the arithmetic mean particle size of particles in the present disclosure measures the particle size of 200 arbitrary particles by an electron microscope, and refers to the arithmetic mean. Also, when the shape of the particles is not spherical, the maximum diameter is taken as the diameter.
  • the volume fraction of the particles in the intermediate layer (the volume ratio of particles in the intermediate layer) is 5% to 90% of the total volume of the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer 10% to 80% is more preferable, 15% to 70% is more preferable, and 20% to 60% is particularly preferable.
  • the volume fraction of the particles in all the intermediate layers (the volume ratio occupied by the particles in the intermediate layer) is from the viewpoint of the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer.
  • the intermediate layer in the present disclosure can contain, if necessary, known additives in addition to the binder and the particles.
  • additives other additives used for the photosensitive layer described later are preferably mentioned.
  • the intermediate layer may have two or more layers, and when the intermediate layer is formed of two or more layers, adhesion between the intermediate layer and the temporary support, and the intermediate layer From the viewpoint of adhesion to each of the photosensitive layers, it is preferably formed of 2 to 5 layers, more preferably formed of 2 or 3 layers, and formed of 2 layers Is particularly preferred.
  • the intermediate layer has two or more layers, it is preferable to contain a water-soluble or alkali-soluble binder in each layer, and the same type of binder may be used in each layer, and different binders may be used. Good.
  • particles having an arithmetic average particle diameter of 400 nm or less may be contained in a plurality of layers, but from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer, It is preferable to be contained in the layer closest to the photosensitive layer.
  • particles having an arithmetic average particle diameter of 400 nm or less are contained in the layer closest to the temporary support among two or more layers in the intermediate layer.
  • the particles having an arithmetic average particle diameter of 400 nm or less are more preferably contained only in the layer closest to the photosensitive layer among the two or more layers in the intermediate layer.
  • the layer closest to the photosensitive layer among the two or more layers in the intermediate layer is “the layer in the intermediate layer It corresponds to "the layer in contact with the photosensitive layer” among the layers above.
  • the average film thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably 0.3 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.3 ⁇ m to 5 ⁇ m, and further preferably 0.3 ⁇ m to 2 ⁇ m, from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer and pattern formability. Is particularly preferred.
  • the measuring method of the average film thickness of each layer in this indication does not have a restriction
  • the thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably smaller than the thickness of the photosensitive layer.
  • the average film thickness of each layer is not particularly limited as long as it is within the above range, but of the two or more layers in the intermediate layer, the average of the layers closest to the photosensitive layer
  • the film thickness is preferably 0.3 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.3 ⁇ m to 5 ⁇ m, and particularly preferably 0.3 ⁇ m to 2.0 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer and pattern formability. .
  • the formation method of the intermediate layer is not particularly limited, but the respective components and a solvent (preferably, an aqueous solvent) are mixed in a predetermined ratio and in an arbitrary method, stirred and dissolved to form the intermediate layer
  • a solvent preferably, an aqueous solvent
  • the resulting solution can be mixed at a predetermined ratio to prepare a composition.
  • the composition prepared as described above can also be used after being filtered using a filter with a pore diameter of 5 ⁇ m or the like.
  • the aqueous solvent include water and water-soluble solvents such as alcohols.
  • the intermediate layer can be easily formed on the temporary support by applying the composition for forming an intermediate layer to the temporary support and drying it.
  • the coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, or ink jet coating.
  • middle layer can also be apply
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive layer in this order.
  • the photosensitive layer in the present disclosure may be a positive photosensitive layer or may be negative photosensitive.
  • the photosensitive layer is preferably a chemically amplified positive photosensitive layer.
  • a photoacid generator such as an onium salt or an oxime sulfonate compound, which will be described later, is a protected acid in a binder having an acid degradable protected acid group in which an acid generated in response to actinic radiation (actinic ray) is generated.
  • the photosensitive layer When the photosensitive layer is a positive photosensitive layer, the photosensitive layer preferably contains a binder and a photoacid generator from the viewpoint of pattern formability.
  • the binder preferably contains a binder having an acid-degradable group-protected acid group from the viewpoint of pattern formability, and a polymer having a structural unit having an acid-degradable protected acid group It is more preferable to contain
  • the photosensitive layer is a negative photosensitive layer
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains a binder having an acid group, a polymerizable compound, and a photopolymerization initiator from the viewpoint of pattern formation.
  • the photosensitive layer contains a polymer (also referred to as a “specific polymer”) having a structural unit (also referred to as “structural unit A”) having an acid-degradable protected acid group.
  • a polymer also referred to as a “specific polymer”
  • structural unit A also referred to as “structural unit A”
  • the photosensitive layer may contain other polymers.
  • the polymer having the structural unit A and the other polymers are collectively referred to as a “polymer component”.
  • the structural unit A having an acid-degradable protected acid group in the specific polymer is subjected to a deprotecting reaction by the action of a catalytic amount of an acidic substance generated by exposure to light, thereby becoming an acid group.
  • This acid group enables a curing reaction.
  • the photosensitive layer may further contain a polymer other than the polymer having a structural unit having an acid-degradable protected acid group. Moreover, it is preferable that all the polymers contained in the said polymer component are polymers which each have a structural unit which has an acidic radical mentioned later at least. In addition, the photosensitive layer may further contain a polymer other than these.
  • the above-mentioned polymer component in the present disclosure is intended to mean one including other polymers added as needed, unless otherwise stated. In addition, even if it is a high molecular compound, the compound applicable to the crosslinking agent and dispersing agent mentioned later shall not be contained in the said polymer component.
  • the specific polymer is preferably a resin of addition polymerization type, and more preferably a polymer having a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid or an ester thereof.
  • the photosensitive layer contains a polymer having a structural unit A1 represented by the following formula A1 as the structural unit A as a polymer component from the viewpoint of suppressing deformation of a pattern shape, solubility in a developer and transferability. It is preferable that the polymer component contains a specific polymer having a constituent unit A1 represented by the following formula A as the constituent unit A and having a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or less, As the structural unit A, a specific polymer having a structural unit A1 represented by the following formula A1 and a structural unit B having an acid group described later and having a glass transition temperature of 90.degree. C. or less More preferable.
  • the specific polymer contained in the photosensitive layer may be only one type, or two or more types.
  • the polymer component includes a polymer having at least a constituent unit A having an acid-degradable protected acid group.
  • the polymer component contains a polymer having the structural unit A, it is possible to obtain a highly sensitive chemically amplified positive type photosensitive layer.
  • the "acid-degradable and protected acid group" in the present disclosure those known as an acid group and an acid-degradable group can be used without particular limitation.
  • a specific acid group a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxyl group are preferably mentioned.
  • the acid-degradable protected acid group a group which is relatively easy to be decomposed by an acid (for example, an ester group protected by a group represented by the formula A1, a tetrahydropyranyl ester group, or a tetrahydrofuranyl ester group) And the like (acetal functional groups such as, etc.) and groups which are relatively difficult to be decomposed by acid (for example, tertiary alkyl groups such as tert-butyl ester group, tertiary alkyl carbonate groups such as tert-butyl carbonate group) it can.
  • a group having a structure protected in the form of acetal is preferable.
  • the structural unit A having an acid group which is protected by an acid decomposable group is preferably a structural unit A1 represented by the following formula A1 from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution.
  • R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 31 and R 32 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 33 is an alkyl group or R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may combine to form a cyclic ether, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X 0 represents a single bond or an arylene group.
  • R 31 or R 32 when R 31 or R 32 is an alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable. When R 31 or R 32 is an aryl group, a phenyl group is preferred. Each of R 31 and R 32 is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 33 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group and the aryl group in R 31 to R 33 may have a substituent.
  • R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and it is preferable that R 31 or R 32 and R 33 link to form a cyclic ether.
  • the number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
  • X 0 represents a single bond or an arylene group, and a single bond is preferred.
  • the arylene group may have a substituent.
  • the constituent unit A1 represented by the formula A1 is a constituent unit having a carboxy group protected by an acid decomposable group. When the specific polymer contains the structural unit A1 represented by the formula A1, the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation is excellent, and is superior to the resolution.
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint of being able to lower the Tg of the specific polymer. More specifically, with respect to the total amount of the structural units A1 contained in the specific polymer is preferably the structural unit R 34 in formula A is a hydrogen atom is at least 20 mass%.
  • the content of the structural unit R 34 is a hydrogen atom in the formula A1 (content: weight ratio) is calculated by the usual method from the 13 C- nuclear magnetic resonance spectra (NMR) measurements It can confirm by intensity ratio of peak intensity.
  • structural units A1 represented by the formula A1 structural units represented by the following formula A2 are more preferable from the viewpoint of further enhancing the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation.
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 35 to R 41 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 34 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R 35 to R 41 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • the structural unit A is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula A3 from the viewpoint of suppressing deformation of the pattern shape.
  • R B1 and R B2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R B1 and R B2 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R B3 is an alkyl group or R B1 or R B2 and R B3 may combine to form a cyclic ether, R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X B is a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • R B12 represents a substituent, and n represents an integer of 0 to 4.
  • R B1 or R B2 when R B1 or R B2 is an alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable. When R B1 or R B2 is an aryl group, a phenyl group is preferred. Each of R B1 and R B2 is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R B3 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group and the aryl group in R B1 to R B3 may have a substituent.
  • R B1 or R B2 and R B3 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and R B1 or R B2 and R B3 are preferably linked to form a cyclic ether.
  • the number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic and may have a substituent.
  • the carbon number of the alkylene group is preferably 1 to 10, and more preferably 1 to 4.
  • X B contains —C (-O) O—
  • R N represents an alkyl group or a hydrogen atom, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms or a hydrogen atom, and more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R B12 represents a substituent, preferably an alkyl group or a halogen atom.
  • the carbon number of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, and more preferably 1 to 4.
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
  • R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint of being able to lower the Tg of the specific polymer. More specifically, it is preferable that the structural unit whose R B4 in the formula A3 is a hydrogen atom is 20% by mass or more with respect to the total content of the structural unit A contained in the specific polymer.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the constituent unit in which R B4 in the formula A3 is a hydrogen atom in the constituent unit A is calculated according to a conventional method from 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum (NMR) measurement. It can confirm by intensity ratio of peak intensity.
  • the structural unit represented by the following Formula A4 is more preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing deformation of the pattern shape.
  • R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R B5 to R B11 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms
  • R B12 represents a substituent
  • n is 0 Represents an integer of ⁇ 4.
  • R B4 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R B5 to R B11 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
  • R B12 represents a substituent, preferably an alkyl group or a halogen atom.
  • the carbon number of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, and more preferably 1 to 4.
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
  • R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • the constituent unit A contained in the specific polymer may be one type or two or more types.
  • the content of the structural unit A in the specific polymer is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 20% by mass to 90% by mass, and more preferably 30% by mass to the total mass of the specific polymer. More preferably, it is 70% by mass.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit A in the specific polymer can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of peak intensities calculated from 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method. Further, the ratio of the structural unit A is preferably 5% by mass to 80% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer component after all the polymer components are decomposed into constituent units (monomer units).
  • the content is more preferably 10% by mass to 80% by mass, and particularly preferably 30% by mass to 70% by mass.
  • the structural unit B is a structural unit that includes a protective group, for example, an acid group that is not protected by an acid-degradable group, that is, an acidic group that does not have a protective group.
  • a protective group for example, an acid group that is not protected by an acid-degradable group, that is, an acidic group that does not have a protective group.
  • the acid group is usually incorporated into the polymer as a structural unit (structural unit B) containing an acid group, using a monomer capable of forming an acid group.
  • structural unit B structural unit containing an acid group
  • the pKa of the acid group is preferably 10 or less, and more preferably 6 or less.
  • the pKa of the acid group is preferably -5 or more.
  • a specific polymer contains a specific polymer by containing the structural unit A and the structural unit B which has an acidic group which is not protected by a protecting group as a copolymerization component, and setting a glass transition temperature to 90 degrees C or less.
  • the positive photosensitive layer has better transferability and removability from the temporary support while maintaining good resolution and sensitivity during pattern formation.
  • the acid group examples include a carboxy group, a sulfonamide group, a phosphonic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phenolic hydroxyl group (phenolic hydroxy group), and a sulfonylimide group.
  • at least one acid group selected from the group consisting of a carboxylic acid group (carboxy group) and a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable.
  • the introduction of a structural unit having an acid group into a specific polymer can be carried out by copolymerizing a monomer having an acid group.
  • the structural unit containing an acid group which is the structural unit B, is a structural unit derived from styrene or a structural unit derived from a vinyl compound, or a structural unit derived from a (meth) acrylic acid. It is more preferable that it is a unit.
  • the structural unit B a structural unit having a carboxylic acid group or a structural unit having a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable from the viewpoint that the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation is better.
  • the monomer having an acid group capable of forming the structural unit B is not limited to the examples described above.
  • the constituent unit B contained in the specific polymer may be only one type or two or more types.
  • the specific polymer preferably contains 0.1% by mass to 20% by mass of a structural unit (structural unit B) having an acid group, based on the total mass of the specific polymer, and includes 0.5% by mass to 15% by mass Is more preferable, and 1% by mass to 10% by mass is more preferable. Within the above range, pattern formability becomes better.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit B in the specific polymer can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of peak intensities calculated from 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method.
  • composition unit C other structural units (hereinafter, may be referred to as structural unit C) other than the structural unit A and the structural unit B described above. You may include in the range.
  • a monomer which forms the structural unit C For example, Styrenes, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid cyclic alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid aryl ester, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid diester , Bicyclo unsaturated compound, maleimide compound, unsaturated aromatic compound, conjugated diene compound, unsaturated monocarboxylic acid, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid anhydride, group having aliphatic cyclic skeleton, other unsaturated Saturated compounds can be mentioned.
  • the Tg of the specific polymer can be easily adjusted to 90 ° C. or less.
  • the specific polymer may contain only one type of the structural unit C, or may contain two or more types.
  • structural unit C is styrene, tert-butoxystyrene, methylstyrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, acetoxystyrene, methoxystyrene, ethoxystyrene, chlorostyrene, methyl vinyl benzoate, ethyl vinyl benzoate, (meth) Methyl acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) Examples thereof include structural units formed by polymerizing benzyl acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, acrylonitrile, or ethylene glycol monoacetoacetate mono (meth) acrylate.
  • a structural unit having an aromatic ring or a structural unit having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton is preferable from the viewpoint of improving the electrical properties of the transfer material to be obtained.
  • a monomer which forms these structural units styrene, tert- butoxystyrene, methylstyrene, alpha-methylstyrene, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, And benzyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
  • structural units derived from cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate are preferably mentioned.
  • (meth) acrylic-acid alkylester is preferable in the adhesive viewpoint, for example.
  • (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion.
  • Specific examples thereof include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate and 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate.
  • 70 mass% or less is preferable with respect to the total mass of a specific polymer, as for content of the structural unit C, 60 mass% or less is more preferable, and 50 mass% or less is still more preferable.
  • the lower limit may be 0% by mass, but is preferably 1% by mass or more, and more preferably 5% by mass or more. Within the above range, resolution and adhesion are further improved.
  • the specific polymer contains a structural unit having an ester of an acid group in the structural unit B as the structural unit C from the viewpoint of optimizing the solubility in a developer and the physical properties of the photosensitive layer.
  • the specific polymer preferably contains, as the structural unit B, a structural unit having a carboxylic acid group, and further preferably contains a structural unit C containing a carboxylic acid ester group as a copolymerization component, for example, (meth) acrylic acid More preferred is a polymer containing the structural unit B derived from and a structural unit (c) derived from cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate or n-butyl (meth) acrylate.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the specific polymer in this indication is 90 degrees C or less.
  • Tg is 90 ° C. or less, the photosensitive layer has high adhesion and is more excellent in transferability.
  • the Tg is more preferably 60 ° C. or less, still more preferably 40 ° C. or less.
  • the lower limit value of the above Tg is not particularly limited, but is preferably ⁇ 20 ° C. or more, more preferably ⁇ 10 ° C. or more.
  • the Tg of the specific polymer is ⁇ 20 ° C.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the entire polymer component in the present disclosure is preferably 90 ° C. or less, more preferably 60 ° C. or less, and 40 ° C. or less from the viewpoint of transferability. Is more preferred.
  • the glass transition temperature of the polymer can be measured using differential scanning calorimetry (DSC). The specific measuring method followed the method as described in JISK7121 (1987) or JISK6240 (2011).
  • the glass transition temperature in the present specification uses an extrapolated glass transition start temperature (hereinafter sometimes referred to as Tig). The method of measuring the glass transition temperature will be described more specifically.
  • Tig extrapolated glass transition start temperature
  • the temperature is maintained at about 50 ° C. lower than the expected polymer Tg until the device is stabilized, and then the heating rate: 20 ° C./min, about 30 at which the glass transition is completed. Heat to a high temperature and draw a DTA curve or a DSC curve.
  • Extrapolation glass transition start temperature that is, the glass transition temperature Tg in the present specification, is a straight line extending the baseline on the low temperature side in the DTA curve or DSC curve to the high temperature side, and the step change portion of the glass transition It is determined as the temperature at the point of intersection with the tangent drawn at the point where the slope of the curve is at a maximum.
  • the FOX formula is used as a guideline from the Tg of the homopolymer of each constitutional unit of the target polymer and the mass ratio of each constitutional unit It is possible to control the Tg of the target specific polymer.
  • the Tg of the homopolymer of the first constitutional unit contained in the polymer is Tg1
  • the mass fraction of the copolymer of the first constitutional unit is W1
  • the Tg of the homopolymer of the second constitutional unit Is Tg2 and the mass fraction of the copolymer of the second structural unit is W2
  • the Tg0 (K) of the copolymer containing the first structural unit and the second structural unit is It is possible to estimate according to the equation.
  • FOX formula: 1 / Tg0 (W1 / Tg1) + (W2 / Tg2)
  • the type and mass fraction of each structural unit contained in the copolymer can be adjusted using the above-described FOX formula to obtain a copolymer having a desired Tg.
  • the molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 60,000 or less in terms of weight average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is 60,000 or less, the melt viscosity of the photosensitive layer can be suppressed low, and bonding at a low temperature (for example, 130 ° C. or less) can be realized when bonding to the substrate .
  • the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 2,000 to 60,000, and more preferably 3,000 to 50,000.
  • the weight average molecular weight of a polymer can be measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography), and various commercially available apparatuses can be used as a measuring apparatus, and the contents of the apparatus and the measuring technique It is known to those skilled in the art.
  • GPC gel permeation chromatography
  • HLC registered trademark
  • GPC manufactured by Tosoh Corp.
  • TSKgel registered trademark
  • Super HZM-M (4) as a column. .6 mm ID x 15 cm, Tosoh Corp. product, Super HZ 4000 (4.6 mm ID x 15 cm, Tosoh Corp.
  • the standard curve is the "standard sample TSK standard, polystyrene” manufactured by Tosoh Corp .: “F-40", “F-20”, “F-4”, “F-1”, “A-5000”, " It can be prepared using any of the seven samples of A-2500 “and” A-1000 ".
  • the ratio (dispersion degree) of the number average molecular weight to the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 1.0 to 5.0, and more preferably 1.05 to 3.5.
  • the method for producing the specific polymer is not particularly limited, but one example is formation of a polymerizable monomer for forming the structural unit A1 represented by the formula A, and a structural unit B having an acid group May be synthesized by polymerization using a polymerization initiator in an organic solvent containing a polymerizable monomer for forming the polymer and, if necessary, a polymerizable monomer for forming the other constituent unit C. it can. Moreover, it can also be synthesized by so-called polymer reaction.
  • the photosensitive layer in the present disclosure contains the polymer component at a ratio of 50% by mass to 99.9% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive layer, from the viewpoint of expressing good adhesion to the substrate. Is preferable, and it is more preferable to include 70% by mass to 98% by mass.
  • the photosensitive layer contains the specific polymer in a ratio of 50% by mass to 99.9% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive layer, from the viewpoint of exhibiting good adhesion to the substrate. Is preferable, and it is more preferable to include 70% by mass to 98% by mass.
  • the photosensitive layer contains, as a polymer component, a polymer which does not contain the structural unit (a) represented by the formula A in addition to the specific polymer as long as the effect of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is not impaired And the like) may be further included.
  • the blending amount of the other polymer is preferably 50% by mass or less, more preferably 30% by mass or less, based on all the polymer components, and 20% by mass. It is further more preferable that the content is% or less.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain only one type of other polymer in addition to the specific polymer, or may contain two or more types.
  • polymers for example, polyhydroxystyrene can be used, and commercially available SMA 1000P, SMA 2000P, SMA 3000P, SMA 1440F, SMA 17352P, SMA 2625P, and SMA 3840F (all, manufactured by Sartmar) , ARUFON UC-3000, ARUFON UC-3510, ARUFON UC-3900, ARUFON UC-3910, ARUFON UC-3920, and ARUFON UC-3080 (all manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), and Joncryl 690, Joncryl 678 , Joncryl 67, and Joncryl 586 (above, manufactured by BASF Corp.) can also be used.
  • the photosensitive layer contains a photoacid generator.
  • the photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is a compound capable of generating an acid upon irradiation with radiation such as ultraviolet light, far ultraviolet light, X-ray, and charged particle beam.
  • the photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably a compound that responds to actinic light having a wavelength of 300 nm or more, preferably 300 nm to 450 nm, and generates an acid, but its chemical structure is not limited.
  • a photoacid generator which does not directly react to actinic light having a wavelength of 300 nm or more can also be used as a sensitizer if it is a compound that responds to actinic light having a wavelength of 300 nm or more by using it in combination with a sensitizer. It can be preferably used in combination.
  • the photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably a photoacid generator that generates an acid with a pKa of 4 or less, more preferably a photoacid generator that generates an acid with a pKa of 3 or less, and a pKa of 2 or less Particularly preferred are photoacid generators which generate an acid of
  • the lower limit value of pKa is not particularly limited, but is preferably, for example, -10.0 or more.
  • the photoacid generator preferably contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of an onium salt compound described later and an oxime sulfonate compound described later from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, and an oxime sulfonate compound More preferably,
  • nonionic photoacid generators examples include trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, imidosulfonate compounds, and oxime sulfonate compounds.
  • the photoacid generator is preferably an oxime sulfonate compound in terms of sensitivity, resolution, and adhesion.
  • These photoacid generators can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • trichloromethyl-s-triazines and diazomethane derivatives compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0088 of JP-A-2011-221494 can be exemplified.
  • the oxime sulfonate compound that is, a compound having an oxime sulfonate structure, is preferably a compound having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the following formula (B1).
  • R 21 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group
  • * represents a bonding site to another atom or another group.
  • any group may be substituted, and the alkyl group in R 21 may be linear or branched, It may have a ring structure.
  • the permissible substituents are described below.
  • the alkyl group of R 21 is a bridged alicyclic group such as an aryl group having 6 to 11 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and a cycloalkyl group (7, 7-dimethyl-2-oxo norbornyl group, etc.
  • the aryl group of R 21 is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group.
  • the aryl group of R 21 may be substituted with one or more groups selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group and a halogen atom.
  • the compound having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the formula (B1) is also preferably the oxime sulfonate compound described in paragraphs 0078 to 0111 of JP-A-2014-85643.
  • Examples of the ionic photoacid generator include onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salts and triarylsulfonium salts, and quaternary ammonium salts. Among these, onium salt compounds are preferable, and triarylsulfonium salts and diaryliodonium salts are particularly preferable.
  • the ionic photoacid generators described in paragraphs 0114 to 0133 of JP-A-2014-85643 can also be preferably used.
  • a photo-acid generator may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
  • the content of the photoacid generator in the photosensitive layer is preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer, from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution. It is more preferable that the content be 5% by mass.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains a polymerizable compound.
  • a polymerizable compound an ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferable.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound is a component that contributes to the photosensitivity (i.e., photocurability) of the photosensitive layer and the strength of the cured film.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound is a compound having one or more ethylenically unsaturated groups.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains, as the ethylenically unsaturated compound, a difunctional or more ethylenically unsaturated compound.
  • the bifunctional or more ethylenic unsaturated compound means a compound having two or more ethylenic unsaturated groups in one molecule.
  • a (meth) acryloyl group is more preferable.
  • a (meth) acrylate compound is preferable.
  • the photosensitive layer is preferably a bifunctional ethylenic unsaturated compound (preferably a bifunctional (meth) acrylate compound) and a trifunctional or more ethylenic one from the viewpoint of further improving the wet heat resistance of the cured film after salting. It is particularly preferable to contain an unsaturated compound (preferably, a trifunctional or higher functional (meth) acrylate compound).
  • bifunctional ethylenic unsaturated compound there is no restriction
  • difunctional ethylenic unsaturated compounds include tricyclodecane dimethanol di (meth) acrylate, tricyclodecane dimethanol di (meth) acrylate, 1,9-nonanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,6-hexane Diol di (meth) acrylate etc. are mentioned.
  • tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate (A-DCP, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), tricyclodecane dimenanol dimethacrylate (DCP, as a difunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound) Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd. product, 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate (A-NOD-N, Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd. product), 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate (A-HD-N, Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. product etc. are mentioned.
  • ethylenically unsaturated compound more than trifunctional there is no restriction
  • the trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound include dipentaerythritol (tri / tetra / penta / hexa) (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol (tri / tetra) (meth) acrylate, and trimethylolpropane tri (meth) Acrylate, ditrimethylolpropane tetra (meth) acrylate, isocyanuric acid (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylate compound of glycerin tri (meth) acrylate skeleton, and the like can be mentioned.
  • (tri / tetra / penta / hexa) (meth) acrylate” is a concept including tri (meth) acrylate, tetra (meth) acrylate, penta (meth) acrylate, and hexa (meth) acrylate
  • (Tri / tetra) (meth) acrylate” is a concept including tri (meth) acrylate and tetra (meth) acrylate.
  • Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound include caprolactone-modified compounds of (meth) acrylate compounds (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. KAYARAD (registered trademark) DPCA-20, Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd. A-9300-1CL, etc.), Alkylene oxide-modified compounds of (meth) acrylate compounds (Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. KAYARAD RP-1040, Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co. Ltd. ATM-35E, A-9300, Daicel Ornex Co., Ltd. EBECRYL (registered trademark) 135 Etc.), ethoxylated glycerin triacrylate (eg, A-GLY-9E manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • caprolactone-modified compounds of (meth) acrylate compounds manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. KAYARAD (registered trademark)
  • urethane (meth) acrylate compound preferably a urethane (meth) acrylate compound having three or more functional groups
  • urethane (meth) acrylate compounds having three or more functional groups include 8UX-015A (manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.), UA-32P (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), UA-1100H (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co. And the like.
  • an ethylenically unsaturated compound contains an ethylenically unsaturated compound which has an acidic radical from a viewpoint of the developability improvement and the wet heat tolerance improvement after salt water provision of a cured film.
  • an acid group a phosphoric acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a carboxy group are mentioned, for example, A carboxy group is preferable.
  • the trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group may be used in combination with the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, if necessary.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group at least one selected from the group consisting of a carboxy group-containing bifunctional or more ethylenically unsaturated compound and its carboxylic acid anhydride is preferable. Thereby, the wet heat resistance after salty application of a cured film increases.
  • the bifunctional or more ethylenically unsaturated compound containing a carboxy group is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately selected from known compounds.
  • Examples of the bifunctional or higher ethylenic unsaturated compound containing a carboxy group include, for example, Allonix (registered trademark) TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), Allonix M-520 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), or And Alonix M-510 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.) can be preferably used.
  • Allonix registered trademark
  • TO-2349 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
  • Allonix M-520 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
  • And Alonix M-510 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group is also preferably a polymerizable compound having an acid group described in paragraphs 0025 to 0030 of JP-A No. 2004-239942. The contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymerizable compound used in the present disclosure is preferably 200 to 3,000, more preferably 250 to 2,600, still more preferably 280 to 2,200, and 300 to 2,200. Particularly preferred.
  • the content ratio of the polymerizable compound having a molecular weight of 300 or less is 30% by mass or less based on all the ethylenically unsaturated compounds contained in the photosensitive layer. Is preferable, 25 mass% or less is more preferable, and 20 mass% or less is still more preferable.
  • the polymerizable compounds may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the polymerizable compound in the photosensitive layer is preferably 1% by mass to 70% by mass, more preferably 10% by mass to 70% by mass, and more preferably 20% by mass to 60% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. More preferably, 20% by mass to 50% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the content of the bifunctional ethylenic unsaturated compound is the same as that contained in the photosensitive layer. 10% by mass to 90% by mass is preferable, 20% by mass to 85% by mass is more preferable, and 30% by mass to 80% by mass is more preferable with respect to the ethylenically unsaturated compound of In this case, the content of the trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 10% by mass to 90% by mass, and more preferably 15% by mass to 80% by mass, with respect to all the ethylenically unsaturated compounds contained in the photosensitive layer.
  • the content of the bifunctional or higher ethylenic unsaturated compound is 40% by mass or more to 100% of the total content of the bifunctional ethylenic unsaturated compound and the trifunctional or higher ethylenic unsaturated compound. It is preferably less than mass%, more preferably 40 mass% to 90 mass%, still more preferably 50 mass% to 80 mass%, and particularly preferably 50 mass% to 70 mass%. .
  • the photosensitive layer may further contain a monofunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound.
  • the photosensitive layer contains a bifunctional or more ethylenically unsaturated compound
  • the bifunctional or more ethylenically unsaturated compound is the main component. preferable.
  • the content of the bifunctional or more ethylenically unsaturated compound is the same as the ethylenically unsaturated compound contained in the photosensitive layer.
  • the content is preferably 60% by mass to 100% by mass, more preferably 80% by mass to 100% by mass, and particularly preferably 90% by mass to 100% by mass, with respect to the total content of
  • the photosensitive layer contains an ethylenic unsaturated compound having an acid group (preferably, a bifunctional or higher ethylenic unsaturated compound containing a carboxy group or a carboxylic acid anhydride thereof), the photosensitive layer has an acid group.
  • the content of the ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 1% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably 1% by mass to 20% by mass, and still more preferably 1% by mass to 10% by mass, with respect to the photosensitive layer.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains a binder having an acid group.
  • a binder which has an acidic radical alkali-soluble resin is preferable.
  • an acid group a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, a phosphonic acid group etc. are mentioned.
  • preferred as the acid group is a carboxy group.
  • the acid value of the binder having an acid group is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of alkali developability, an alkali-soluble resin having an acid value of 60 mg KOH / g or more is preferable, and a carboxy group containing an acid value of 60 mg KOH / g or more Particularly preferred is an acrylic resin.
  • the binder having an acid group can thermally crosslink with a compound capable of reacting with an acid by heating to increase the three-dimensional crosslink density by having the acid value.
  • the carboxy group of the carboxy group-containing acrylic resin is anilized and hydrophobized to contribute to the improvement of the wet heat resistance.
  • the carboxy group-containing acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mg KOH / g or more (hereinafter, may be referred to as specific polymer A) is not particularly limited as long as the above acid value conditions are satisfied. Can be used.
  • an alkali-soluble resin which is a carboxyl group-containing acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more paragraphs 0033 to 0052 of JP-A-2010-237589
  • carboxy group-containing acrylic resins having an acid value of 60 mg KOH / g or more can be preferably used as the specific polymer A in the present disclosure.
  • the (meth) acrylic resin refers to a resin containing at least one of a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid and a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid ester. 30 mol% or more is preferable and, as for the sum total ratio of the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid and the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid ester in (meth) acrylic resin, 50 mol% or more is more preferable.
  • the preferred range of the copolymerization ratio of the monomer having a carboxy group in the specific polymer A is 5% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably 10% by mass to 40% by mass, with respect to 100% by mass of the polymer Preferably, it is in the range of 12% by mass to 30% by mass.
  • the specific polymer A may have a reactive group, and as a means for introducing the reactive group into the specific polymer A, a hydroxyl group, a carboxy group, a primary or secondary amino group, an acetoacetyl group, a sulfonic acid And the like, for example, a method of reacting an epoxy compound, a blocked isocyanate, an isocyanate, a vinyl sulfone compound, an aldehyde compound, a methylol compound, a carboxylic acid anhydride and the like.
  • the specific polymer A the compound A shown below is preferable.
  • the content ratio of each structural unit shown below can be suitably changed according to the objective.
  • the acid value of the binder having an acid group used in the present disclosure is preferably 60 mg KOH / g to 200 mg KOH / g, more preferably 60 mg KOH / g to 150 mg KOH / g, and more preferably 60 mg KOH, from the viewpoint of alkali developability. It is further preferable that the amount is in the range of / g to 110 mg KOH / g.
  • the acid value means a value measured according to the method described in JIS K 0070 (1992).
  • the weight average molecular weight of the binder having an acid group is preferably 1,000 or more, more preferably 10,000 or more, and still more preferably 20,000 to 100,000.
  • the binder which has the said acid group can be suitably selected and used for any film formation resin other than the said specific polymer A according to the objective.
  • any film formation resin other than the said specific polymer A for example, polyhydroxystyrene resin, polyimide resin, polybenzoxazole resin, polysiloxane resin, etc. can be mentioned preferably.
  • the binder having an acid group may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the binder having an acid group in the photosensitive layer is preferably 10% by mass to 90% by mass, and more preferably 20% by mass to 80% by mass, with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. Is more preferably 30% by mass to 70% by mass.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the photopolymerization initiator receives the actinic light such as ultraviolet light and visible light to initiate polymerization of the ethylenically unsaturated compound.
  • actinic light such as ultraviolet light and visible light
  • a well-known photoinitiator can be used.
  • a photopolymerization initiator having an oxime ester structure hereinafter, also referred to as “oxime-based photopolymerization initiator”
  • a photopolymerization initiator having an ⁇ -aminoalkylphenone structure hereinafter, “ ⁇ -aminoalkylphenone”
  • ⁇ -aminoalkylphenone also referred to as aminoalkylphenone photopolymerization initiators
  • photopolymerization initiators having an ⁇ -hydroxyalkylphenone structure hereinafter also referred to as “ ⁇ -hydroxyalkylphenone polymerization initiators”
  • acyl phosphine oxide structures Photopolymerization initiator (hereinafter, also referred to as "acyl phosphine oxide photopolymerization initiator")
  • photopolymerization initiator having an N-phenylglycine structure hereinafter, "N-phenylglycine photopolymerization initiator”
  • the photopolymerization initiator is at least selected from the group consisting of an oxime photopolymerization initiator, an ⁇ -aminoalkylphenone photopolymerization initiator, an ⁇ -hydroxyalkylphenone polymerization initiator, and an N-phenylglycine photopolymerization initiator. It is preferable to include one, and it is more preferable to include at least one selected from the group consisting of an oxime photopolymerization initiator, an ⁇ -aminoalkylphenone photopolymerization initiator, and an N-phenylglycine photopolymerization initiator. .
  • photopolymerization initiator for example, polymerization initiators described in paragraphs 0031 to 0042 of JP-A-2011-95716 and paragraphs 0064 to 0081 of JP-A-2015-014783 may be used.
  • the photopolymerization initiator may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator in the photosensitive layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, and more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. % Or more is more preferable. Moreover, 10 mass% or less is preferable with respect to the total mass of a photosensitive layer, and, as for content of a photoinitiator, 5 mass% or less is more preferable.
  • the photosensitive layer in the present disclosure may further contain known additives, if necessary, in addition to the components described above.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of film thickness uniformity.
  • a surfactant any of anionic, cationic, nonionic (nonionic), or amphoteric can be used, but a preferred surfactant is a nonionic surfactant.
  • nonionic surfactants include polyoxyethylene higher alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene higher alkyl phenyl ethers, higher fatty acid diesters of polyoxyethylene glycol, silicone surfactants, and fluorine surfactants. .
  • KP made by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • Polyflow made by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • F-top made by JEMCO
  • Megafac made by DIC
  • Florard Suditomo 3M
  • Each series may be mentioned, such as (manufactured by Co., Ltd.), Asahi Guard, Surfron (manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.), PolyFox (manufactured by OMNOVA), and SH-8400 (manufactured by Toray Dow Corning).
  • the weight average as polystyrene conversion measured by the gel permeation chromatography at the time of using tetrahydrofuran (THF) as a solvent, containing the structural unit A and the structural unit B represented by following formula I-1 as surfactant is used
  • a copolymer having a molecular weight (Mw) of 1,000 or more and 10,000 or less can be mentioned as a preferred example.
  • each of R 401 and R 403 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 402 represents a linear alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms
  • R 404 represents a hydrogen atom or carbon
  • L represents an alkyl group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms
  • p and q each represent a polymerization percentage
  • p represents a numerical value of 10% to 80% by mass
  • Q represents a numerical value of 20% to 90% by mass
  • r represents an integer of 1 to 18 and s represents an integer of 1 to 10
  • * represents a binding site to another structure Represent.
  • L is preferably a branched alkylene group represented by the following formula (I-2).
  • R 405 in the formula (I-2) represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and in view of compatibility and wettability to the coated surface, an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms is preferable, and the carbon number is Two or three alkyl groups are more preferred.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the copolymer is more preferably 1,500 or more and 5,000 or less.
  • the surfactant may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the addition amount of the surfactant is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 0.001% by mass to 10% by mass, and more preferably 0.01% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. More preferably, it is 3% by mass.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain at least one polymerization inhibitor.
  • a polymerization inhibitor for example, a thermal polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph 0018 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784 can be used. Among them, phenothiazine, phenoxazine or 4-methoxyphenol can be suitably used.
  • the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01% by mass to 3% by mass, and preferably 0.01% by mass to 1% by mass, with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. % Is more preferable, and 0.01% by mass to 0.8% by mass is more preferable.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain a solvent.
  • the photosensitive resin composition which forms the said photosensitive layer makes a solvent contain once, adjusts the viscosity of the photosensitive resin composition, and the photosensitive resin composition containing a solvent is included. Can be applied and dried to suitably form the photosensitive layer.
  • a well-known solvent can be used as a solvent used for this indication.
  • ethylene glycol monoalkyl ethers As a solvent, ethylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, ethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, ethylene glycol mono alkyl ether acetates, propylene glycol mono alkyl ethers, propylene glycol dialkyl ethers, propylene glycol mono alkyl ether acetates, diethylene glycol dialkyl ethers And diethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol dialkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, esters, ketones, amides, and lactones.
  • specific examples of the solvent also include the solvents described in paragraphs [0174] to [0178] of JP-A-2011-221494, the contents of which are incorporated in the present specification.
  • Solvents such as nonal, benzyl alcohol, anisole, benzyl acetate, ethyl benzoate, diethyl oxalate, diethyl maleate, ethylene carbonate or propylene carbonate can also be added.
  • the solvent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the solvents that can be used in the present disclosure may be used alone or in combination of two.
  • two or more solvents for example, combined use of propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates and dialkyl ethers, combined use of diacetates and diethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, or esters and butylene glycol alkyl ether acetate Preferably used in combination with a class.
  • the solvent is preferably a solvent having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or more and less than 160 ° C., a solvent having a boiling point of 160 ° C. or more, or a mixture thereof.
  • solvents having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or more and less than 160 ° C. propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (boiling point 146 ° C.), propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (boiling point 158 ° C.), propylene glycol methyl-n-butyl ether (boiling point 155 ° C.), Propylene glycol methyl-n-propyl ether (bp 131 ° C.) can be exemplified.
  • ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate (boiling point 170 ° C.), diethylene glycol methyl ethyl ether (boiling point 176 ° C.), propylene glycol monomethyl ether propionate (boiling point 160 ° C.), dipropylene glycol methyl ether acetate (Boiling point 213 ° C), 3-methoxybutyl ether acetate (boiling point 171 ° C), diethylene glycol diethyl ether (boiling point 189 ° C), diethylene glycol dimethyl ether (boiling point 162 ° C), propylene glycol diacetate (boiling point 190 ° C), diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (Boiling point 220 ° C.), dipropylene glycol dimethyl ether (boiling point 175 ° C.), and 1,
  • the content of the solvent is preferably 50 parts by mass to 1,900 parts by mass, and 100 parts by mass to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content in the photosensitive resin composition. More preferably, it is 900 parts by mass.
  • the content of the solvent in the photosensitive layer is preferably 2% by mass or less, more preferably 1% by mass or less, and more preferably 0.5% by mass or less based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. Is more preferred.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain a plasticizer for the purpose of improving the plasticity. It is preferable that the said plasticizer has a smaller weight average molecular weight than a specific polymer.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the plasticizer is preferably 500 or more and less than 10,000, more preferably 700 or more and less than 5,000, and still more preferably 800 or more and less than 4,000 from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity.
  • the plasticizer is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound that is compatible with the specific polymer to exhibit plasticity, but from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity, the plasticizer preferably has an alkyleneoxy group in the molecule.
  • the alkyleneoxy group contained in the plasticizer preferably has the following structure.
  • R is an alkyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms
  • n is an integer of 1 to 50
  • * represents a bonding site to another atom.
  • compound X a compound having an alkyleneoxy group of the above structure
  • compound X chemically amplified positive type photosensitivity obtained by mixing the compound X, a specific polymer and a photoacid generator
  • the resin composition does not improve the plasticity as compared with the chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin composition formed without containing the compound X, it does not correspond to the plasticizer in the present disclosure.
  • surfactants that are optionally added do not fall under the plasticizers herein because they are not generally used in amounts that provide plasticity to the photosensitive resin composition.
  • plasticizer although the compound which has the following structure is mentioned, for example, it is not limited to these.
  • the content of the plasticizer is preferably 1% by mass to 50% by mass, and more preferably 2% by mass to 20% by mass, with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer, from the viewpoint of adhesion.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain only one type of plasticizer, or may contain two or more types.
  • the photosensitive layer can further contain a sensitizer.
  • the sensitizer absorbs an actinic ray to be in an electronically excited state.
  • the sensitizer in the electronically excited state comes into contact with the photoacid generator to produce actions such as electron transfer, energy transfer and heat generation.
  • the photoacid generator chemically changes and decomposes to generate an acid. Exposure sensitivity can be improved by containing a sensitizer.
  • anthracene derivatives compounds selected from the group consisting of anthracene derivatives, acridone derivatives, thioxanthone derivatives, coumarin derivatives, base styryl derivatives, and distyryl benzene derivatives are preferable, and anthracene derivatives are more preferable.
  • anthracene derivative anthracene, 9,10-dibutoxyanthracene, 9,10-dichloroanthracene, 2-ethyl-9,10-dimethoxyanthracene, 9-hydroxymethylanthracene, 9-bromoanthracene, 9-chloroanthracene, 9 10-dibromoanthracene, 2-ethylanthracene or 9,10-dimethoxyanthracene is preferred.
  • sensitizer examples include the compounds described in paragraph 0139 to paragraph 0141 of WO 2015/093271.
  • the content of the sensitizer is preferably 0% by mass to 10% by mass, and more preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass, with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably further contains a basic compound.
  • a basic compound any one of basic compounds used in a chemical amplification resist can be selected and used.
  • aliphatic amines, aromatic amines, heterocyclic amines, quaternary ammonium hydroxides, and quaternary ammonium salts of carboxylic acids can be mentioned. Specific examples thereof include the compounds described in paragraphs [0204] to [0207] of JP-A-2011-221494, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • aliphatic amines for example, trimethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, di-n-propylamine, tri-n-propylamine, di-n-pentylamine, tri-n-pentylamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine
  • examples include ethanolamine, dicyclohexylamine, and dicyclohexylmethylamine.
  • aromatic amines include aniline, benzylamine, N, N-dimethylaniline, and diphenylamine.
  • heterocyclic amine examples include pyridine, 2-methylpyridine, 4-methylpyridine, 2-ethylpyridine, 4-ethylpyridine, 2-phenylpyridine, 4-phenylpyridine, N-methyl-4-phenylpyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, imidazole, benzimidazole, 4-methylimidazole, 2-phenylbenzimidazole, 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole, nicotine, nicotinic acid, nicotinic acid amide, quinoline, 8-oxyquinoline, pyrazine, Pyrazole, pyridazine, purine, pyrrolidine, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, 4-methylmorpholine, 1,5-diazabicyclo [4.3.0] -5-nonene, and 1,8-diazabicyclo [5.3.0] -7-Undesen etc.
  • Examples of quaternary ammonium hydroxides include tetramethyl ammonium hydroxide, tetraethyl ammonium hydroxide, tetra-n-butyl ammonium hydroxide, and tetra-n-hexyl ammonium hydroxide.
  • Examples of quaternary ammonium salts of carboxylic acids include tetramethyl ammonium acetate, tetramethyl ammonium benzoate, tetra-n-butyl ammonium acetate, and tetra-n-butyl ammonium benzoate.
  • the above basic compounds may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the basic compound is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5% by mass, and more preferably 0.005% by mass to 3% by mass, with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
  • the photosensitive layer in the present disclosure can contain a heterocyclic compound.
  • a heterocyclic compound there is no particular limitation on the heterocyclic compound in the present disclosure.
  • a compound having an epoxy group or an oxetanyl group in the molecule described below an alkoxymethyl group-containing heterocyclic compound, various cyclic ethers, oxygen-containing monomers such as cyclic esters (lactones), nitrogen-containing monomers such as cyclic amines and oxazolines
  • heterocyclic monomers having d electrons such as silicon, sulfur and phosphorus can be added.
  • the addition amount of the heterocyclic compound in the photosensitive layer is preferably 0.01% by mass to 50% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer, when the heterocyclic compound is added. % To 10% by mass is more preferable, and 1% to 5% by mass is even more preferable. It is preferable in the viewpoint of adhesiveness and etching tolerance as it is the said range.
  • the heterocyclic compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • Specific examples of the compound having an epoxy group in the molecule include bisphenol A epoxy resin, bisphenol F epoxy resin, phenol novolac epoxy resin, cresol novolac epoxy resin, aliphatic epoxy resin and the like.
  • bisphenol A epoxy resin bisphenol F epoxy resin, phenol novolac epoxy resin and aliphatic epoxy resin are more preferable, and aliphatic epoxy resin is particularly preferable.
  • the compound having an oxetanyl group in the molecule include alonoxetane OXT-201, OXT-211, OXT-212, OXT-213, OXT-121, OXT-221, OX-SQ, PNOX Co., Ltd. can be used.
  • the compound containing an oxetanyl group individually or in mixture with the compound containing an epoxy group.
  • the heterocyclic compound is a compound having an epoxy group.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain an alkoxysilane compound.
  • an alkoxysilane compound a trialkoxysilane compound is mentioned preferably.
  • the alkoxysilane compound for example, ⁇ -aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, ⁇ -aminopropyltriethoxysilane, ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltriacoxysilane, ⁇ -glycidoxypropylalkyldialkoxysilane, ⁇ -methacryloxy Propyltrialkoxysilane, ⁇ -methacryloxypropylalkyldialkoxysilane, ⁇ -chloropropyltrialkoxysilane, ⁇ -mercaptopropyltrialkoxysilane, ⁇ - (3,4-epoxycyclohexyl) ethyltrialkoxysilane, vinyltrialkoxysilane Can be mentioned.
  • ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane and ⁇ -methacryloxypropyltrialkoxysilane are more preferable, ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane is more preferable, and 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane is particularly preferable. preferable. These can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • metal oxide particles an antioxidant, a dispersant, an acid multiplying agent, a development accelerator, a conductive fiber, a colorant, a thermal radical polymerization initiator, a thermal acid generator, an ultraviolet absorber, Further known additives such as thickeners, crosslinkers and organic or inorganic suspending agents can be added. Preferred embodiments of the other components are described in paragraphs [0165] to [0184] of JP-A-2014-85643, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the average film thickness of the photosensitive layer is preferably 1.0 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 2.0 ⁇ m or more, and still more preferably 5.0 ⁇ m or more, from the viewpoint of transferability (lamination property).
  • the average film thickness of the photosensitive layer is preferably 20 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 15 ⁇ m or less, from the viewpoint of production suitability.
  • the photosensitive resin composition for forming a photosensitive layer can be prepared by mixing each component and a solvent in any proportion and in any method and stirring and dissolving. For example, after preparing each solution as a solution in which each component is previously dissolved in a solvent, the resulting solution can be mixed at a predetermined ratio to prepare a composition.
  • the composition prepared as described above can also be used after being filtered using a filter with a pore size of 0.2 ⁇ m or the like.
  • a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure having a photosensitive layer on a temporary support can be obtained by applying the photosensitive resin composition onto the intermediate layer and drying it.
  • the coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, or ink jet coating.
  • a photosensitive layer can also be apply
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may have layers other than the temporary support, the intermediate layer, and the photosensitive layer (hereinafter, may be referred to as “other layers”).
  • Other layers include a contrast enhancement layer, a cover film, a thermoplastic resin layer and the like.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure preferably further includes a thermoplastic resin layer between the temporary support and the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of transferability.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may have a cover film for the purpose of protecting the photosensitive layer.
  • Preferred embodiments of the thermoplastic resin layer are described in paragraphs 0189 to 0193 of JP-A-2014-85643, and preferred embodiments of the other layers are described in paragraphs 0194 to 0-196 of JP-A-2014-85643, respectively.
  • the thermoplastic resin layer preferably contains at least one thermoplastic resin selected from the group consisting of an acrylic resin and a styrene / acrylic copolymer.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has another layer such as a thermoplastic resin layer
  • it is produced according to the method for producing a photosensitive transfer material described in paragraph 0094 to paragraph 0098 of JP-A-2006-259138. can do.
  • a solution in which a thermoplastic organic polymer and an additive are dissolved on a temporary support (for thermoplastic resin layer Coating liquid) is applied and dried to form a thermoplastic resin layer, and then a resin and an additive are added to a solvent which does not dissolve the thermoplastic resin layer on the obtained thermoplastic resin layer (intermediate liquid (intermediate) Layer composition) is applied and dried to laminate the intermediate layer.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is preferably applied by further applying a photosensitive resin composition prepared using a solvent that does not dissolve the intermediate layer onto the formed intermediate layer, and drying and laminating a photosensitive layer. Can be produced.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure can have a contrast enhancement layer in addition to the photosensitive layer.
  • a material with a contrast enhancement layer (Contrast Enhancement Layer; CEL) that absorbs significantly to the exposure wavelength before exposure but gradually decreases as it is exposed, that is, the light transmittance increases (photo-decoloring (Referred to as a sex pigment component).
  • CEL contrast Enhancement Layer
  • As the photobleachable dye component diazonium salts, stilbazolium salts, aryl nitroso salts and the like are known.
  • a phenolic resin etc. are used as a film formation component.
  • the resin pattern production method according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited as long as it is a resin pattern production method using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, but the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is nearest to the photosensitive layer side.
  • the process of bonding the outer layer to the support, the process of exposing the photosensitive layer to a pattern, and the process of developing the photosensitive layer subjected to the pattern exposure, and developing the photosensitive layer after the process of bonding to the support Preferably, the method further comprises the step of peeling off the temporary support.
  • the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited as long as it is a wiring manufacturing method using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, but the most on the photosensitive layer side in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure.
  • a step of bonding the outer layer to a support having a conductive layer on the surface, a step of pattern exposing the photosensitive layer, a step of developing the photosensitive layer subjected to the pattern exposure to form a resin pattern, the conductive using the resin pattern as a mask The process of etching a layer and the process of peeling the said resin pattern are included, The process of peeling the said temporary support after the process of bonding together to the said support and before the process of developing the said photosensitive layer Is preferred.
  • the “outside layer on the photosensitive layer side” in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure means a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure having the photosensitive layer in this order. Needless to say, it is the outermost layer on the photosensitive layer side.
  • the said support body is also called “a base material”
  • the support body which has a conductive layer in the said surface is also called a "board
  • the photosensitive resin composition is divided into a negative type in which a portion irradiated with an actinic ray remains as an image and a positive type in which a portion not irradiated with an actinic ray is left as an image.
  • the solubility of the exposed area is enhanced by irradiating an actinic ray, for example, using a photosensitizer that emits an actinic ray to generate an acid, so that both the exposed area and the unexposed area are exposed at the pattern exposure time.
  • the substrate can be reused (reworked) by overall exposure or the like.
  • the resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure Preferably, the mode in which is carried out two or more times is mentioned.
  • the resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is a support having the outermost layer on the photosensitive layer side in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, or a support having a conductive layer on the surface. It is preferable that the process (lamination process) of bonding together is included.
  • the photosensitive transfer material is preferably brought into contact with a support or a base material having a conductive layer on the surface thereof for bonding. Further, in the bonding step, it is preferable that the conductive layer be pressure-bonded so that the outermost layer on the photosensitive layer side is in contact.
  • the patterned photosensitive layer after exposure and development can be suitably used as an etching resist when etching the conductive layer.
  • a well-known transfer method and the lamination method can be used. Specifically, for example, it is preferable to overlap the photosensitive layer side of the photosensitive transfer material on the conductive layer, and to apply pressure by a roll or the like or to apply pressure and heat.
  • laminators such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, and an auto-cut laminator capable of further enhancing productivity can be used.
  • the pressure and temperature of the pressure bonding in the bonding step are not particularly limited, and are appropriately set according to the material of the surface of the support to be bonded, for example, the materials of the conductive layer and the photosensitive layer, the transport speed, and the pressure bonding machine used. can do.
  • the cover film When the cover film is provided on the photosensitive layer of the photosensitive transfer material, the cover film may be removed from the photosensitive layer and then pressure-bonded.
  • the said base material is a resin film, you may pressure-bond by roll-to-roll.
  • a support body is a glass base material or a film base material, and, as for a substrate by which a plurality of conductive layers were laminated on a support body, it is more preferred that it is a film base material.
  • a support body is a sheet-like resin composition.
  • the support is preferably transparent.
  • the refractive index of the support is preferably 1.50 to 1.52.
  • the support may be made of a translucent base material such as a glass base material, and for example, tempered glass represented by Gorilla glass of Corning Co., Ltd. can be used.
  • materials used in JP-A-2010-86684, JP-A-2010-152809 and JP-A-2010-257492 can be preferably used.
  • a film substrate is used as the substrate, it is more preferable to use a substrate having no optical distortion and a substrate having high transparency, and for specific materials, polyethylene terephthalate (PET), Examples include polyethylene naphthalate, polycarbonate, triacetyl cellulose and cycloolefin polymers.
  • any conductive layer used for general wiring or touch panel wiring can be mentioned.
  • the material of the conductive layer include metals and metal oxides.
  • the metal oxide ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), IZO (Indium Zinc Oxide), may be mentioned SiO 2 and the like.
  • the metal include Al, Zn, Cu, Fe, Ni, Cr, Mo and the like.
  • At least one of the plurality of conductive layers includes a metal oxide.
  • a conductive layer it is preferable that it is an electrode pattern corresponded to the sensor of the visual recognition part used for an electrostatic capacitance type touch panel, or wiring of a periphery extraction part.
  • the wiring formation substrate used in the present disclosure is preferably a substrate having a conductive layer on the surface of the base material. Wiring is formed by patterning the conductive layer. In this example, it is preferable that a plurality of conductive layers such as metal oxides and metals be provided on a film substrate such as PET.
  • the resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure preferably includes the step of exposing the photosensitive layer to a pattern (exposure step) after the bonding step.
  • the exposure step it is preferable to irradiate an actinic ray through a support provided with a coating or a mask having a predetermined pattern on a substrate.
  • the photoacid generator is decomposed to generate an acid.
  • the acid-degradable group contained in the coating film component is hydrolyzed to form an acid group such as a carboxy group or a phenolic hydroxyl group.
  • the detailed arrangement and specific size of the pattern are not particularly limited.
  • the electrode pattern and the part of the lead-out wiring are thin lines of 100 .mu.m or less, and more preferably 70 .mu.m or less.
  • the exposure in the exposure step may be exposure through a mask or digital exposure using a laser or the like, but is preferably exposure through an exposure mask.
  • the resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure includes the step of bringing the photosensitive transfer material into contact with the exposure mask between the bonding step and the exposure step. Is preferred. It is excellent by the resolution of the pattern obtained as it is the said aspect.
  • actinic ray visible light, ultraviolet light, and electron beam may be mentioned, and visible light or ultraviolet light is preferable, and ultraviolet light is particularly preferable.
  • a low pressure mercury lamp, a high pressure mercury lamp, an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp, a chemical lamp, a light emitting diode (LED) light source, an excimer laser generator etc. can be used as an exposure light source by actinic light
  • An actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more and 450 nm or less such as h ray (405 nm) can be preferably used.
  • a spectral filter such as a long wavelength cut filter, a short wavelength cut filter, or a band pass filter as needed.
  • Exposure dose depending on the photosensitive layer to be used may be appropriately selected, but is preferably from 5mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 200mJ / cm 2, more preferably 10mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 100mJ / cm 2. Further, it is also preferable to carry out heat treatment before development for the purpose of improving the rectangularity and linearity of the pattern after exposure. By means of a process called so-called PEB (Post Exposure Bake), it is possible to reduce roughness of the pattern edge due to standing waves generated in the photosensitive layer at the time of exposure.
  • PEB Post Exposure Bake
  • the pattern exposure may be exposure through a mask or digital exposure using a laser or the like.
  • the resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure preferably includes the step (developing step) of developing the photosensitive layer after the exposing step to form a pattern.
  • the intermediate layer of the exposed portion is also removed together with the exposed photosensitive layer.
  • the intermediate layer in the unexposed area may also be removed in the form of being dissolved or dispersed in the developer.
  • the development of the exposed photosensitive layer in the development step can be performed using a developer.
  • the developer is not particularly limited as long as the exposed portion of the photosensitive layer can be removed, and, for example, a known developer such as a developer described in JP-A-5-72724 can be used.
  • the developing solution is preferably a developing solution in which the exposed portion of the photosensitive layer has a dissolution type developing behavior.
  • the developer is preferably an alkaline aqueous solution, and more preferably an alkaline aqueous solution containing, for example, a compound having a pKa of 7 to 13 at a concentration of 0.05 mol / L (liter) to 5 mol / L.
  • the developer may further contain an organic solvent miscible with water, a surfactant, and the like.
  • a developing solution preferably used in the present disclosure for example, a developing solution described in paragraph 0194 of WO 2015/093271 can be mentioned.
  • the developing method is not particularly limited, and may be any of paddle development, shower development, shower and spin development, dip development and the like.
  • shower development exposed portions can be removed by spraying a developer onto the photosensitive layer and the intermediate layer after exposure.
  • after development it is preferable to remove a development residue while spraying a cleaning agent or the like with a shower and rubbing with a brush or the like.
  • the temperature of the developing solution is preferably 20 ° C to 40 ° C.
  • the effect of suppressing the deformation of the pattern shape in the present disclosure is more exhibited when the time from exposure to development is longer.
  • the resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure includes known steps such as a step of washing with water after development and a step of drying a support having the obtained pattern. May be included.
  • Post-baking heating is preferably performed under an environment of 8.1 kPa to 121.6 kPa, and more preferably performed under an environment of 50.66 kPa or more.
  • the post-baking temperature is preferably 80 ° C. to 250 ° C., more preferably 110 ° C. to 170 ° C., and particularly preferably 130 ° C. to 150 ° C.
  • the post-baking time is preferably 1 minute to 30 minutes, more preferably 2 minutes to 10 minutes, and particularly preferably 2 minutes to 4 minutes.
  • Post-baking may be performed in an air environment or in a nitrogen-substituted environment.
  • the transport speed of the support at each step in the resin pattern production method according to the present disclosure or the wiring production method according to the present disclosure it is 0.5 m / min to 10 m except during exposure. / Min is preferable, and 2.0 m / min to 8.0 m / min is more preferable except at the time of exposure.
  • the method for producing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method for producing a wiring according to the present disclosure includes the step of peeling the temporary support after the step of bonding to the support and before the step of developing the photosensitive layer. It is preferable to include a (peeling step).
  • the resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure uses the photosensitive transfer material having the above-mentioned intermediate layer, so that it is at any timing after laminating the photosensitive transfer material and before development. Even if the temporary support is peeled off, since the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer is excellent, the occurrence of defects such as partial peeling of the intermediate layer can be suppressed, and pattern formation can be favorably performed.
  • the step of pattern exposing the photosensitive layer it is more preferable to include the step of exfoliating the above-mentioned temporary support before. Furthermore, in the above aspect, when pattern exposure is performed by bringing a mask into contact, the photosensitive layer and the mask do not come in direct contact with each other, so the pattern formability and resolution are superior.
  • the method of peeling off the temporary support in the peeling step is not particularly limited, and may be peeled by a known method.
  • the wiring manufacturing method which concerns on this indication includes the process (etching process) which carries out the etching process of the said conductive layer in the area
  • the pattern formed from the photosensitive layer in the developing step is used as an etching resist to etch the conductive layer.
  • etching can be applied by a known method such as a method described in paragraph 0048 to paragraph 0054 of JP-A-2010-152155 or a dry etching method such as a known plasma etching.
  • etching solution used for wet etching may be appropriately selected from acid type or alkaline type etching solution in accordance with the object of etching.
  • acid type etching solution an aqueous solution of only an acidic component such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, acetic acid, hydrofluoric acid, oxalic acid or phosphoric acid, an acidic component and ferric chloride, ammonium fluoride or permanganate
  • a mixed aqueous solution of salts such as potassium acid and the like are exemplified.
  • An acidic component may use the component which combined the several acidic component.
  • an alkaline type etching solution an aqueous solution of only an alkaline component such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia, an organic amine, or a salt of an organic amine such as tetramethyl ammonium hydroxide, an alkaline component and potassium permanganate And the like.
  • an alkali component a component obtained by combining a plurality of alkali components may be used.
  • the temperature of the etching solution is not particularly limited, but is preferably 45 ° C. or less.
  • a pattern used as an etching mask preferably exhibits particularly excellent resistance to an acidic and alkaline etching solution in a temperature range of 45 ° C. or less. Therefore, the peeling of the pattern during the etching process is prevented, and the portion where the pattern does not exist is selectively etched.
  • a step of washing the support having the etched conductive layer (washing step), if necessary, and a support having the etched conductive layer You may perform the process (drying process) to dry.
  • the substrate may be cleaned with pure water at normal temperature (10 ° C. to 35 ° C.) for 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
  • air blow may be used, and the air blow pressure (about 0.1 kg / cm 2 to 5 kg / cm 2 ) may be appropriately adjusted to perform drying.
  • the wiring manufacturing method which concerns on this indication includes the process (etching resist peeling process) which peels the said photosensitive layer using peeling liquid after the said etching process. After completion of the etching process, the patterned photosensitive layer remains. If the photosensitive layer is unnecessary, all remaining photosensitive layers may be removed.
  • the substrate having the above-mentioned photosensitive layer or the like is preferably added to the peeling solution during stirring at preferably 30 ° C. to 80 ° C., more preferably 50 ° C. to 80 ° C. A method of soaking for a minute may be mentioned.
  • peeling solution for example, an inorganic alkali component such as sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide, or an organic alkali component such as a tertiary amine or a quaternary ammonium salt, water, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, or And stripping solutions dissolved in these mixed solutions.
  • a peeling solution may be used, and peeling may be performed by a spray method, a shower method, a paddle method, or the like.
  • the exposure step, the developing step, and the etching step may be repeated twice or more as necessary.
  • the exposure step, the development step and other steps in the present disclosure the methods described in paragraphs 0035 to 0051 of JP-A-2006-23696 can be suitably used in the present disclosure.
  • the resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may include other arbitrary steps.
  • the following processes are mentioned, it is not limited to these processes.
  • the wiring manufacturing method can include the step of reducing the visible light reflectance of the surface of the conductive layer, for example, part or all of the surface of the conductive layer provided on the support.
  • An oxidation process etc. can be mentioned as a process which reduces the visible light reflectance.
  • the visible light reflectance can be reduced by blackening.
  • Paragraph 0017-Paragraph 0025 of Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2014-150118 and Paragraph 0041, Paragraph 0042, Paragraph 0048 and Paragraph 0058 of Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-206315.
  • the contents of this publication are incorporated herein by reference.
  • a step of forming an insulating film on the support having the conductive layer for example, on the formed wiring (the conductive layer etched), and a new conductive layer on the insulating film It is also preferable to include the forming step.
  • limiting in particular about the process of forming an insulating film The method of forming a well-known permanent film can be mentioned.
  • an insulating film with a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having an insulating property.
  • a photosensitive material having conductivity may be used to form a new conductive layer of a desired pattern by photolithography.
  • the new conductive layer may be etched by forming an etching resist by the same method as described above, or may be separately etched by a known method.
  • the wiring substrate obtained by the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may have a wiring of only one layer or a wiring of two or more layers on the substrate.
  • the support may have a plurality of conductive layers on both surfaces respectively, and circuits may be sequentially or simultaneously formed on the conductive layers formed on both surfaces of the support.
  • Wiring having a first conductive pattern (first wiring) formed on one surface of the support and a second conductive pattern (second wiring) formed on the other surface by such a configuration, preferably for a touch panel Wiring can be formed.
  • the wiring according to the present disclosure is a wiring manufactured by the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure. Moreover, as said wiring, a circuit wiring is mentioned preferably.
  • the wiring substrate according to the present disclosure is a substrate having a wiring manufactured by the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure. Although the use of the wiring board which concerns on this indication is not limited, For example, it is preferable that it is a wiring board for touch panels.
  • the input device according to the present disclosure may be an input device having at least a wiring manufactured by the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, and is preferably a capacitive touch panel.
  • the display device according to the present disclosure preferably includes the input device according to the present disclosure.
  • the display device according to the present disclosure is preferably an image display device such as an organic EL display device and a liquid crystal display device.
  • the touch panel according to the present disclosure is a touch panel having at least a wiring manufactured by the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure.
  • the touch panel according to the present disclosure preferably includes at least a transparent substrate, an electrode, and an insulating layer or a protective layer.
  • the touch panel display device according to the present disclosure is a touch panel display device having at least a wiring manufactured by the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, and is preferably a touch panel display device having a touch panel according to the present disclosure.
  • any known methods such as a resistive film method, a capacitance method, an ultrasonic method, an electromagnetic induction method, and an optical method may be used.
  • the capacitance method is preferable.
  • a so-called in-cell type for example, those shown in FIGS. 5, 6, 7 and 8 of JP-A-2012-517051
  • a so-called on-cell type for example, JP-A 2013-168125
  • OGS One Glass Solution
  • TOL Touch-on-Lens
  • GG G1 ⁇ G2, GFF, GF2, GF1, G1F etc.
  • Example 1 ⁇ Preparation of Composition 1 for Forming Intermediate Layer> Composition 1 for forming an intermediate layer was produced according to the following formulation. Distilled water: 13.4 parts Methanol: 75.6 parts Hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (trade name: TC-5, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.): 4.1 parts ⁇ Snowtex O (silica particles, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd., average particle size 12 nm): 68.5 parts
  • MATHF tetrahydrofuran-2-yl methacrylate
  • PAG-1 Compound A-1 of the following structure
  • Surfactant 1 F-554, a perfluoroalkyl group-containing nonionic surfactant (manufactured by DIC Corporation)
  • Additive 1 (N-cyclohexyl-N '-[2- (4-morpholinyl) ethyl] thiourea, abbreviated as CHMETU)
  • composition 1 for forming an intermediate layer was slit coated on a 50 ⁇ m thick polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film (provisional support 1) so as to have a dry film thickness of 2.0 ⁇ m, and dried in a 100 ° C. convection oven for 2 minutes I did.
  • photosensitive resin composition 1 was applied onto this intermediate layer using a slit nozzle so that the dry film thickness would be 3.0 ⁇ m. Thereafter, it was dried in a convection oven at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes, and finally a polyethylene film (manufactured by Tredegar, OSM-N) was pressure-bonded as a protective film to prepare a dry film resist.
  • the obtained dry film resist was used as the dry film resist (photosensitive transfer material) of Example 1.
  • Example 12 A photosensitive transfer material of Example 12 was obtained in the same manner as Example 1, except that the following photosensitive resin composition 2 was used instead of the photosensitive resin composition 1.
  • Example 13 A photosensitive transfer material of Example 13 was obtained in the same manner as Example 1, except that the following photosensitive resin composition 3 was used instead of the photosensitive resin composition 1.
  • a negative photosensitive resin composition 3 was produced according to the following formulation.
  • Acrylic acid-methyl methacrylate copolymer (Mw 20,000, acid value 130 mg KOH / g): 30 parts
  • Propylene glycol monomethyl ether 100 parts
  • Irgacure 907 (manufactured by BASF): 4.0 parts
  • Trimethylpropane triacrylate 15.0 copies
  • Comparative example 1 A photosensitive transfer material of Comparative Example 1 was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the following laminated temporary support was used instead of the temporary support 1 and the intermediate layer was not formed.
  • Laminated temporary support Toray Industries Co., Ltd., a laminated support of polyethylene terephthalate (PET), and the layer on the photosensitive layer side contains SiO 2 particles (average particle diameter: 500 nm).
  • Comparative example 2 A photosensitive transfer material of Comparative Example 2 was obtained in the same manner as Example 1, except that the intermediate layer contained no particles.
  • Printerac C manufactured by Nitto Denko Corp.
  • Cut into 4.5 cm ⁇ 15 cm was stuck on the laminate, and cut into 4.5 cm ⁇ 9 cm so that the width of the tape and the support matched.
  • the resultant was subjected to 180 ° peeling at a peeling speed of 100 mm / min using a Tensilon universal tester made by A & D Co., and the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer was measured.
  • the adhesion at that time was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. The larger the value, the better, and 5 to 3 is a practical range.
  • the photosensitive transfer material of the example is excellent in the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer as compared with the photosensitive transfer material of the comparative example.
  • grains described in Table 1 is an arithmetic mean particle diameter, and is measured by the measuring method mentioned above.
  • a to C described in the “Resist” column in Table 1 indicate that the photosensitive layer in the photosensitive transfer material is a chemically amplified positive resist layer in the case of A, and in the case of B, the photosensitive transfer material In the case of C, it represents that the photosensitive layer in the photosensitive transfer material is a negative resist layer.
  • the details of the particles described in Table 1 other than those described above are as follows. SiO 2 (average particle diameter 50 nm): silica particles, Nissan Chemical Industries Ltd.
  • Example 18 ⁇ Preparation of Composition 18 for Forming Intermediate Layer A and Composition 18 for Forming Intermediate Layer B> Composition 18 for forming intermediate layer A (hereinafter referred to as “interlayer of two layers”) by the same method as in Example 1 so as to obtain the composition described in Table 2 and the volume fraction described in Table 2
  • the layer provided on the temporary support side is also referred to as an intermediate layer A)
  • the composition 18 for forming an intermediate layer B (hereinafter, the layer provided on the photosensitive layer side among the two intermediate layers) is referred to as an intermediate layer B. Also referred to are each prepared.
  • composition 18 for forming intermediate layer A was slit coated on a 50 ⁇ m thick polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film (provisional support 1) so as to have a dry film thickness of 2.0 ⁇ m, and 2 in a 100 ° C. convection oven. It was allowed to dry for a minute to form an intermediate layer A.
  • the composition 18 for forming an intermediate layer B was slit-coated so as to have a dry film thickness of 2.0 ⁇ m and dried in a 100 ° C. convection oven for 2 minutes to form an intermediate layer B.
  • photosensitive resin composition 1 was applied onto this intermediate layer using a slit nozzle so that the dry film thickness would be 3.0 ⁇ m.
  • Example 18 The adhesion evaluation was performed in the same manner as in Example 1 using the obtained photosensitive transfer material of Example 18. The evaluation results are shown in Table 2.
  • Example 19 to 25 Using the composition for forming the intermediate layer A and the composition for forming the intermediate layer B having the composition of the intermediate layer A and the intermediate layer B described in Table 2, it is carried out so as to have the volume fraction and the film thickness described in Table 2.
  • the photosensitive transfer materials of Examples 19 to 25 were produced in the same manner as in Example 18 except that the intermediate layer A and the intermediate layer B were formed in the same manner as in Example 18, and the adhesion was evaluated. The evaluation results are shown in Table 2.
  • Example 26 A photosensitive transfer material of Example 26 was obtained in the same manner as in Example 23, except that the following photosensitive resin composition 2 was used instead of the photosensitive resin composition 1.
  • Example 27 A photosensitive transfer material of Example 27 was obtained in the same manner as in Example 23, except that the following photosensitive resin composition 3 was used instead of the photosensitive resin composition 1.
  • HMPC hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (trade name: TC-5, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.)
  • PVA Polyvinyl alcohol (trade name: Kurare Hoval PVA 205, manufactured by Kuraray Co., Ltd.)
  • HPC Hydroxypropyl Cellulose (trade name: HPC-SSL, manufactured by Nippon Soda Co., Ltd.)
  • Acrylic resin methacrylic acid / benzyl methacrylate copolymer (Mw: 11,000, composition ratio (molar ratio): 30/70) SiO 2 (average particle diameter 50 nm): silica particles, Nissan Chemical Industries Ltd. Snowtex XL, arithmetic average particle diameter 50 nm
  • ITO Indium tin oxide
  • Example 101 Indium tin oxide (ITO) is deposited by sputtering as a conductive layer of the second layer on a 100 ⁇ m-thick PET substrate to a thickness of 150 nm by sputtering, and copper is deposited thereon by a vacuum evaporation method to a thickness of 200 nm as a conductive layer of the first layer.
  • the film formation was performed to form a circuit formation substrate.
  • the photosensitive transfer material prepared in Example 1 was laminated on the copper layer (linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min, roll temperature 90 ° C.).
  • the contact pattern was exposed using a photomask provided with a pattern (hereinafter also referred to as “pattern A”) shown in FIG.
  • the solid line portion SL and the gray portion G are light shielding portions, and the dotted line portion DL virtually illustrates the alignment alignment frame.
  • the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a pattern A.
  • the copper layer is etched using a copper etching solution (Cu-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), and then the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching liquid (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.)
  • pattern alignment was performed using a photomask provided with an opening of a pattern shown in FIG. 3 (hereinafter, also referred to as “pattern B”) in a state where alignment is aligned, and development and water washing were performed.
  • the gray portion G is a light shielding portion
  • the dotted line portion DL virtually illustrates the alignment alignment frame.
  • the copper layer was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive layer was peeled using a peeling solution (10 mass% aqueous sodium hydroxide solution) to obtain a wiring board.
  • a peeling solution (10 mass% aqueous sodium hydroxide solution
  • 10 temporary support
  • 12 intermediate layer
  • 14 photosensitive layer
  • 16 cover film
  • 100 photosensitive transfer material
  • SL solid line portion
  • G gray portion
  • DL dotted portion

Abstract

A photosensitive transfer material which sequentially comprises a provisional supporting body, an intermediate layer and a photosensitive layer in this order, and wherein the intermediate layer contains a binder and particles that have an arithmetic mean particle diameter of 400 nm or less; and a method for producing a resin pattern and a method for producing a wiring line, each of which uses the above-described photosensitive transfer material.

Description

感光性転写材料、樹脂パターン製造方法、及び、配線製造方法Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, and wiring manufacturing method
 本開示は、感光性転写材料、樹脂パターン製造方法、及び、配線製造方法に関する。 The present disclosure relates to a photosensitive transfer material, a resin pattern manufacturing method, and a wiring manufacturing method.
 静電容量型入力装置などのタッチパネルを備えた表示装置(有機エレクトロルミネッセンス(EL)表示装置及び液晶表示装置など)では、視認部のセンサーに相当する電極パターン、周辺配線部分及び取り出し配線部分の配線などの導電層パターンがタッチパネル内部に設けられている。
 一般的にパターン化した層の形成には、必要とするパターン形状を得るための工程数が少ないといったことから、感光性転写材料を用いて任意の基板上に設けた感光性樹脂組成物の層に対して、所望のパターンを有するマスクを介して露光した後に現像する方法が広く使用されている。
In a display device (organic electroluminescence (EL) display device, liquid crystal display device, etc.) provided with a touch panel such as a capacitance type input device, an electrode pattern corresponding to a sensor of a visual recognition portion, wiring of peripheral wiring portions and extraction wiring portions And the like are provided inside the touch panel.
In general, for forming a patterned layer, a layer of a photosensitive resin composition provided on an arbitrary substrate using a photosensitive transfer material since the number of steps for obtaining a required pattern shape is small. On the other hand, a method of developing after exposure through a mask having a desired pattern is widely used.
 従来の方法としては、例えば、特開2016-224161号公報には、基材上に、(a)感光層、(b)樹脂層が形成された積層体を、露光し、加熱処理し、現像する工程を含むレジストパターンの形成方法が開示されている。
 また、特開2014-74764号公報には、支持フィルムと、上記支持フィルム上に形成された感光層と、を備える感光性エレメントであって、上記支持フィルムが、感光層と接する面とは反対面に自己治癒層を有し、上記感光層が、(A)バインダーポリマー、(B)エチレン性不飽和結合を有する光重合性化合物及び(C)光重合開始剤を含有する感光性エレメントが開示されている。
As a conventional method, for example, in JP-A-2016-224161, a laminate having (a) a photosensitive layer and (b) a resin layer formed on a substrate is exposed, heat-treated, and developed. A method of forming a resist pattern is disclosed which includes the steps of
JP-A 2014-74764 discloses a photosensitive element comprising a support film and a photosensitive layer formed on the support film, wherein the support film is opposite to the surface in contact with the photosensitive layer. Disclosed is a photosensitive element having a self-healing layer on the surface, wherein the photosensitive layer comprises (A) a binder polymer, (B) a photopolymerizable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, and (C) a photopolymerization initiator. It is done.
 本発明の一実施形態が解決しようとする課題は、中間層と感光層との密着性に優れる感光性転写材料を提供することである。
 また、本発明の他の一実施形態が解決しようとする課題は、上記感光性転写材料を用いた樹脂パターン製造方法、及び、配線製造方法を提供することである。
The problem to be solved by the embodiment of the present invention is to provide a photosensitive transfer material which is excellent in the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer.
Another problem to be solved by another embodiment of the present invention is to provide a resin pattern manufacturing method and a wiring manufacturing method using the photosensitive transfer material.
 上記課題を解決するための手段には、以下の態様が含まれる。
<1> 仮支持体、中間層、及び、感光層をこの順で有し、上記中間層が、バインダー、及び、算術平均粒子径が400nm以下である粒子を含有する感光性転写材料。
<2> 上記中間層における上記粒子の体積分率が、中間層の全体積に対し、5%~90%である上記<1>に記載の感光性転写材料。
<3> 上記中間層の平均膜厚が、0.3μm~10μmである上記<1>又は<2>に記載の感光性転写材料。
<4> 上記中間層が含有する上記粒子が、Si、Ti及びZrよりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の元素の酸化物粒子、又は、有機粒子である上記<1>~<3>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<5> 上記感光層が、バインダー、及び、光酸発生剤を含有する上記<1>~<4>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<6> 上記感光層に含有される上記バインダーが、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有するバインダーを含有する上記<5>に記載の感光性転写材料。
<7> 上記感光層が、酸基を有するバインダー、重合性化合物、及び、光重合開始剤を含有する上記<1>~<4>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<8> 上記中間層に含有される上記バインダーが、変性セルロース樹脂を含む上記<1>~<7>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<9> 上記中間層が、2層以上の層を有する上記<1>~<8>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<10> 上記中間層における2層以上の層のうち、上記感光層に最も近い層にのみ上記算術平均粒子径が400nm以下である粒子を含有する上記<9>に記載の感光性転写材料。
<11> 上記<1>~<10>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料における上記感光層側の最外層を支持体に貼り合わせる工程、上記感光層をパターン露光する工程、及び、パターン露光された上記感光層を現像する工程を含み、上記支持体に貼り合わせる工程の後、かつ上記感光層を現像する工程の前に、上記仮支持体を剥離する工程を含む樹脂パターン製造方法。
<12> 上記<1>~<10>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料における上記感光層側の最外層を表面に導電層を有する支持体に貼り合わせる工程、上記感光層をパターン露光する工程、パターン露光された上記感光層を現像して樹脂パターンを形成する工程、上記樹脂パターンをマスクとして上記導電層をエッチングする工程、及び、上記樹脂パターンを剥離する工程を含み、上記支持体に貼り合わせる工程の後、かつ上記感光層を現像する工程の前に、上記仮支持体を剥離する工程を含む配線製造方法。
Means for solving the above problems include the following aspects.
<1> A photosensitive transfer material comprising a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive layer in this order, wherein the intermediate layer contains a binder and particles having an arithmetic average particle diameter of 400 nm or less.
<2> The photosensitive transfer material according to <1>, wherein the volume fraction of the particles in the intermediate layer is 5% to 90% of the total volume of the intermediate layer.
<3> The photosensitive transfer material according to <1> or <2>, wherein an average film thickness of the intermediate layer is 0.3 μm to 10 μm.
<4> The particles of the above <1> to <3>, wherein the particles contained in the intermediate layer are oxide particles of at least one element selected from the group consisting of Si, Ti and Zr, or organic particles The photosensitive transfer material as described in any one.
<5> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of the above <1> to <4>, wherein the photosensitive layer contains a binder and a photoacid generator.
<6> The photosensitive transfer material according to <5>, wherein the binder contained in the photosensitive layer contains a binder having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group.
<7> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of the above <1> to <4>, wherein the photosensitive layer contains a binder having an acid group, a polymerizable compound, and a photopolymerization initiator.
<8> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of the above <1> to <7>, wherein the binder contained in the intermediate layer contains a modified cellulose resin.
<9> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of the above <1> to <8>, wherein the intermediate layer has two or more layers.
<10> The photosensitive transfer material according to the above <9>, wherein particles having an arithmetic average particle diameter of 400 nm or less are contained only in the layer closest to the photosensitive layer among two or more layers in the intermediate layer.
<11> A step of laminating the outermost layer on the photosensitive layer side in the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <10> to a support, a step of patternwise exposing the photosensitive layer, A method of producing a resin pattern comprising the step of developing the photosensitive layer which has been subjected to pattern exposure, and the step of peeling the temporary support after the step of bonding to the support and before the step of developing the photosensitive layer. .
<12> A step of bonding the outermost layer on the photosensitive layer side in the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <10> to a support having a conductive layer on the surface, the photosensitive layer having a pattern The step of exposing, developing the pattern-exposed photosensitive layer to form a resin pattern, etching the conductive layer using the resin pattern as a mask, and peeling the resin pattern; A method for producing a wiring, comprising the step of peeling off the temporary support after the step of bonding to a body and before the step of developing the photosensitive layer.
 本発明の一実施形態によれば、中間層と感光層との密着性に優れる感光性転写材料を提供することができる。
 また、本発明の他の一実施形態によれば、上記感光性転写材料を用いた樹脂パターン製造方法、及び、配線製造方法を提供することができる。
According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a photosensitive transfer material which is excellent in the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer.
Further, according to another embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a resin pattern manufacturing method and a wiring manufacturing method using the photosensitive transfer material.
本開示に係る感光性転写材料の層構成の一例を示す概略図である。FIG. 2 is a schematic view showing an example of a layer configuration of a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure. パターンAを示す概略図である。FIG. 6 is a schematic view showing a pattern A. パターンBを示す概略図である。FIG. 7 is a schematic view showing a pattern B.
 以下、本開示の内容について説明する。なお、添付の図面を参照しながら説明するが、符号は省略する場合がある。
 また、本明細書において「~」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む範囲を意味する。
 また、本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリル」はアクリル及びメタクリルの双方、又は、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリレート」はアクリレート及びメタクリレートの双方、又は、いずれかを表す。
 更に、本明細書において組成物中の各成分の量は、組成物中に各成分に該当する物質が複数存在する場合、特に断らない限り、組成物中に存在する該当する複数の物質の合計量を意味する。
 本明細書において「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけでなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であっても工程の所期の目的が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。
 本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換及び無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さないものと共に置換基を有するものをも包含するものである。例えば「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含するものである。
 また、本明細書における化学構造式は、水素原子を省略した簡略構造式で記載する場合もある。
 本開示において、「質量%」と「重量%」とは同義であり、「質量部」と「重量部」とは同義である。
 また、本開示において、2以上の好ましい態様の組み合わせは、より好ましい態様である。
 また、本開示における重量平均分子量(Mw)及び数平均分子量(Mn)は、特に断りのない限り、TSKgel GMHxL、TSKgel G4000HxL、TSKgel G2000HxL(何れも東ソー(株)製の商品名)のカラムを使用したゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)分析装置により、溶媒THF(テトラヒドロフラン)、示差屈折計により検出し、標準物質としてポリスチレンを用いて換算した分子量である。
The contents of the present disclosure will be described below. In addition, although it demonstrates, referring an attached drawing, a code | symbol may be abbreviate | omitted.
Further, in the present specification, a numerical range represented using “to” means a range including numerical values described before and after “to” as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
Moreover, in this specification, "(meth) acryl" represents both or any of acrylic and methacryl, and "(meth) acrylate" represents both or any of acrylate and a methacrylate.
Furthermore, in the present specification, the amount of each component in the composition is the total of a plurality of corresponding substances present in the composition unless a plurality of substances corresponding to each component are present in the composition. Means quantity.
In the present specification, the term "process" is included in the term if the intended purpose of the process is achieved, even if it can not be clearly distinguished from other processes, as well as independent processes.
In the notation of groups (atomic groups) in the present specification, notations not describing substitution and non-substitution include those having no substituent as well as those having a substituent. For example, the "alkyl group" includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
Moreover, the chemical structural formula in this specification may be described by the simplified structural formula which abbreviate | omitted the hydrogen atom.
In the present disclosure, “mass%” and “weight%” are synonymous, and “mass part” and “part by weight” are synonymous.
Also, in the present disclosure, a combination of two or more preferred embodiments is a more preferred embodiment.
Moreover, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) in the present disclosure use columns of TSKgel GMHxL, TSKgel G4000HxL, and TSKgel G2000HxL (all are trade names manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) unless otherwise noted. It is a molecular weight which is detected using a solvent THF (tetrahydrofuran) and a differential refractometer by a gel permeation chromatography (GPC) analyzer and a polystyrene as a standard substance.
(感光性転写材料)
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、仮支持体、中間層、及び、感光層をこの順で有し、上記中間層が、バインダー、及び、算術平均粒子径が400nm以下である粒子を含有する。
(Photosensitive transfer material)
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive layer in this order, and the intermediate layer contains a binder and particles having an arithmetic average particle diameter of 400 nm or less. .
 感光性転写材料を、仮支持体/中間層/感光層(/カバーフィルム)という層構成にすることで、種々の利点がある。例えば、基板などに感光層をラミネート後、パターン露光する時、仮支持体を剥離してから、マスクをコンタクト露光することが可能となったり(感光層とマスクとは接触しない。)、感光層形成時に仮支持体表面の凹凸や異物の影響を受けずに均一な膜厚の感光層を形成できたりする等の利点がある。
 この構成とすると、仮支持体を剥離する場合に、仮支持体と中間層との間で剥がれる場合や、中間層と感光層との間で剥がれる場合があり、剥離される界面が安定しないという問題があることを本発明者らは見出した。つまり、中間層と感光層との密着力が不足する場合があると考えられる。
 中間層と感光層との層間密着力を十分確保するため、中間層にフィラーを添加して層界面における感光層との接触面積を増やし、物理的な作用で密着力を上げることを本発明者らは見出した。こうすることで、仮支持体と中間層との間で安定して剥離することができる。
 本発明者らは鋭意検討を重ねた結果、上記構成の感光性転写材料とすることにより、中間層と感光層との密着性に優れることを見出した。
 詳細な上記効果の発現機構は不明であるが、上述したように、算術平均粒子径が400nm以下である粒子を中間層に含有させることにより、層界面における感光層との接触面積が増加し、中間層と感光層との密着性を向上させていると本発明者らは推定している。
 また、前記粒子の算術平均粒子径が400nm以下であることにより、層界面における感光層との接触面積がより増加し、中間層と感光層との密着性を向上させていると本発明者らは推定している。
There are various advantages in making the photosensitive transfer material into a layer structure of temporary support / interlayer / photosensitive layer (/ cover film). For example, when laminating a photosensitive layer on a substrate or the like and then performing pattern exposure, the temporary support can be peeled off and then the mask can be contact exposed (the photosensitive layer and the mask are not in contact) or the photosensitive layer. There is an advantage that a photosensitive layer having a uniform film thickness can be formed without being affected by irregularities on the surface of the temporary support or foreign substances at the time of formation.
With this configuration, when the temporary support is peeled off, it may be peeled off between the temporary support and the intermediate layer, or may be peeled off between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer, and the interface to be peeled is not stable. The inventors have found that there is a problem. That is, it is considered that the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer may be insufficient.
In order to ensure sufficient interlayer adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer, the present inventors added a filler to the intermediate layer to increase the contact area with the photosensitive layer at the layer interface and to increase the adhesion by physical action. They found it. By doing this, it is possible to stably separate between the temporary support and the intermediate layer.
As a result of intensive studies, the present inventors have found that the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer is excellent by using the photosensitive transfer material having the above configuration.
Although the mechanism of manifestation of the above-mentioned effects is unclear, as described above, the inclusion of particles having an arithmetic average particle diameter of 400 nm or less in the intermediate layer increases the contact area with the photosensitive layer at the layer interface, The present inventors estimate that the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer is improved.
In addition, when the arithmetic average particle diameter of the particles is 400 nm or less, the contact area with the photosensitive layer at the layer interface is further increased, and the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer is improved by the present inventors. Is estimating.
 以下、本開示に係る感光性転写材料について、詳細に説明する。 Hereinafter, the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure will be described in detail.
 図1は、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の層構成の一例を概略的に示している。図1に示す感光性転写材料100は、仮支持体10と、中間層12と、感光層14と、カバーフィルム16とがこの順に積層されている。
 中間層12は、バインダー、及び、算術平均粒子径が400nm以下である粒子を含有する。
 以下、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の構成材料等について説明する。
FIG. 1 schematically shows an example of the layer configuration of a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure. In the photosensitive transfer material 100 shown in FIG. 1, a temporary support 10, an intermediate layer 12, a photosensitive layer 14, and a cover film 16 are laminated in this order.
The intermediate layer 12 contains a binder and particles having an arithmetic average particle diameter of 400 nm or less.
Hereinafter, constituent materials and the like of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure will be described.
<仮支持体>
 仮支持体は、中間層及び感光層を支持し、中間層から剥離可能な支持体である。
 本開示に用いられる仮支持体は、感光層をパターン露光する際に仮支持体を介して感光層を露光し得る観点から光透過性を有することが好ましい。
 光透過性を有するとは、パターン露光に使用する光の主波長の透過率が50%以上であることを意味し、パターン露光に使用する光の主波長の透過率は、露光感度向上の観点から、60%以上が好ましく、70%以上がより好ましい。透過率の測定方法としては、大塚電子(株)製MCPD Seriesを用いて測定する方法が挙げられる。
 仮支持体としては、ガラス基板、樹脂フィルム、紙等が挙げられ、強度及び可撓性等の観点から、樹脂フィルムが特に好ましい。樹脂フィルムとしては、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、トリ酢酸セルロースフィルム、ポリスチレンフィルム、ポリカーボネートフィルム等が挙げられる。中でも、2軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムが特に好ましい。
<Temporary support>
The temporary support is a support that supports the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer and can be peeled off from the intermediate layer.
The temporary support used in the present disclosure preferably has light transmittance from the viewpoint of being able to expose the photosensitive layer through the temporary support when the photosensitive layer is subjected to pattern exposure.
Having light transmission means that the transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is 50% or more, and the transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is a viewpoint of improving exposure sensitivity. Therefore, 60% or more is preferable, and 70% or more is more preferable. As a measuring method of the transmittance | permeability, the method of measuring using Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd. product MCPD Series is mentioned.
As a temporary support body, a glass substrate, a resin film, paper etc. are mentioned, A resin film is especially preferable from a viewpoint of intensity | strength, flexibility, etc. As a resin film, a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, a polycarbonate film etc. are mentioned. Among them, biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is particularly preferable.
 仮支持体の厚みは、特に限定されず、5μm~200μmの範囲が好ましく、取扱い易さ、汎用性などの点で、10μm~150μmの範囲がより好ましい。
 仮支持体の厚みは、支持体としての強度、配線形成用基板との貼り合わせに求められる可撓性、最初の露光工程で要求される光透過性などの観点から、材質に応じて選択すればよい。
The thickness of the temporary support is not particularly limited, and is preferably in the range of 5 μm to 200 μm, and more preferably in the range of 10 μm to 150 μm in terms of handleability, versatility and the like.
The thickness of the temporary support can be selected according to the material from the viewpoints of strength as a support, flexibility required for bonding to a wiring formation substrate, light transmittance required in the first exposure step, and the like. Just do it.
 仮支持体の好ましい態様については、例えば、特開2014-85643号公報の段落0017~段落0018に記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 The preferred embodiment of the temporary support is described, for example, in paragraphs 0017 to 0018 of JP-A-2014-85643, and the contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
<中間層>
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、バインダー、及び、算術平均粒子径が400nm以下である粒子を含有する。
<Middle class>
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure contains a binder and particles having an arithmetic average particle diameter of 400 nm or less.
-バインダー-
 バインダーは、水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性のバインダーであることが好ましく、水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性のポリマーであることがより好ましい。
 なお、本開示において、「水溶性」とは、25℃においてpH7.0の水への溶解度が0.1質量%以上であることを意味し、「アルカリ可溶性」とは、25℃においてpH8.5以上のアルカリ水溶液への溶解度が0.1質量%以上であることを意味する。
 また、上記「水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性であり」とは、水溶性か、アルカリ可溶性のいずれかであっても、水溶性かつアルカリ可溶性であってもよい。
-binder-
The binder is preferably a water-soluble or alkali-soluble binder, and more preferably a water-soluble or alkali-soluble polymer.
In the present disclosure, “water-soluble” means that the solubility in water of pH 7.0 at 25 ° C. is 0.1% by mass or more, and “alkali-soluble” means that pH 8.5 at 25 ° C. It means that the solubility to 5 or more alkaline aqueous solution is 0.1 mass% or more.
The above-mentioned "water-soluble or alkali-soluble" may be either water-soluble or alkali-soluble, or both water-soluble and alkali-soluble.
 バインダーとしては、例えば、フェノールホルムアルデヒド樹脂、m-クレゾールホルムアルデヒド樹脂、p-クレゾールホルムアルデヒド樹脂、m-/p-混合クレゾールホルムアルデヒド樹脂、フェノール/クレゾール(m-,p-,又はm-/p-混合のいずれでもよい)混合ホルムアルデヒド樹脂等のノボラック樹脂、ピロガロールアセトン樹脂、ポリヒドロキシスチレン樹脂、変性セルロース樹脂、ヒドロキシ基を有するアクリル樹脂(例えば、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレートの単独重合体又は共重合体)、デンプン類、グリコーゲン類、キチン類、アガロース類、カラギーナン類、プルラン類、アラビアガム、ソヤガム、ポリアミド樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、ポリアセタール樹脂、アクリル樹脂、ポリスチレン樹脂、ポリウレタン樹脂、ポリビニルアルコール、ポリビニルホルマール、ポリアミド樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、ポリエチレンイミン、ポリアリルアミン、ポリアルキレングリコール等が挙げられる。 As the binder, for example, phenol formaldehyde resin, m-cresol formaldehyde resin, p-cresol formaldehyde resin, m- / p-mixed cresol formaldehyde resin, phenol / cresol (m-, p- or m- / p- mixed Any may be used) Novolak resin such as mixed formaldehyde resin, pyrogallol acetone resin, polyhydroxystyrene resin, modified cellulose resin, acrylic resin having hydroxy group (for example, homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate), Starches, glycogens, chitins, agaroses, carrageenans, pullulan, gum arabic, soy gum, polyamide resin, epoxy resin, polyacetal resin, acrylic resin, polystyrene resin, Urethane resins, polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl formal, polyamide resin, polyester resin, polyethyleneimine, polyallylamine, polyalkylene glycol, and the like.
 これらの中でも、バインダーとしては、中間層と感光層との密着性及びパターン形成性の観点から、ノボラック樹脂、変性セルロース樹脂及びヒドロキシ基を有するアクリル樹脂よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の樹脂であることが好ましく、変性セルロース樹脂及びヒドロキシ基を有するアクリル樹脂よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の樹脂であることがより好ましく、変性セルロース樹脂であることが更に好ましい。
 また、変性セルロース樹脂としては、中間層と感光層との密着性及びパターン形成性の観点から、ヒドロキシアルキル化セルロースが好ましい。
 ヒドロキシアルキル化セルロースとしては、ヒドロキシメチルセルロース、ヒドロキシエチルセルロース、ポリヒドロキシエチル化セルロース、ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース、ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロース、グリオキザール化ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロース、ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロースフタレート等が好ましく挙げられる。
 中でも、中間層と感光層との密着性及びパターン形成性の観点から、ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース及びヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロースよりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の樹脂であることが好ましく、ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロースであることがより好ましい。
 また、バインダーとしては、中間層と感光層との密着性の観点から、ポリビニルアルコール、及び、ポリビニルホルマールよりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の樹脂であることが好ましく、ポリビニルアルコールであることがより好ましい。
Among these, the binder is at least one resin selected from the group consisting of novolak resins, modified cellulose resins, and acrylic resins having a hydroxy group from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer and patternability. It is preferable that the resin is at least one resin selected from the group consisting of a modified cellulose resin and an acrylic resin having a hydroxy group, more preferably a modified cellulose resin.
Further, as the modified cellulose resin, a hydroxyalkylated cellulose is preferable from the viewpoint of the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer and the pattern forming property.
Preferred examples of the hydroxyalkylated cellulose include hydroxymethylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, polyhydroxyethylated cellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, glyoxalized hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose phthalate and the like.
Among them, at least one resin selected from the group consisting of hydroxypropyl cellulose and hydroxypropyl methylcellulose is preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer and patternability, and it is preferable to be hydroxypropyl methylcellulose. More preferable.
The binder is preferably at least one resin selected from the group consisting of polyvinyl alcohol and polyvinyl formal from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer, and polyvinyl alcohol is more preferable. preferable.
 バインダーの重量平均分子量は、中間層と感光層との密着性、パターン形成性、露光後の現像液への溶解性及び転写性の観点から、1,000以上であることが好ましく、2,000~100,000であることが好ましく、10,000~50,000であることがより好ましい。 The weight-average molecular weight of the binder is preferably 1,000 or more, from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer, patternability, solubility in a developer after exposure, and transferability. It is preferably ̃100,000 and more preferably 10,000 to 50,000.
 上記中間層は、バインダーを1種単独で含有していても、2種以上を含有していてもよい。
 中間層中のバインダーの含有量は、中間層と感光層との密着性、パターン形成性、露光後の現像液への溶解性及び転写性の観点から、中間層の全質量に対し、1質量%以上99質量%以下であることが好ましく、1質量%以上90質量%以下であることがより好ましく、2質量%以上80質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、3質量%以上70質量%以下であることが特に好ましい。
The intermediate layer may contain one kind of binder alone, or may contain two or more kinds of binders.
The content of the binder in the intermediate layer is 1 mass to the total mass of the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer, the patternability, the solubility in a developer after exposure and the transferability. % Or more and 99% by mass or less is preferable, 1% by mass or more and 90% by mass or less is more preferable, 2% by mass or more and 80% by mass or less is more preferable, and 3% by mass or more and 70% by mass or less Is particularly preferred.
-算術平均粒子径が400nm以下である粒子-
 上記中間層は、算術平均粒子径が400nm以下である粒子を含有する。
 上記粒子としては、中間層と感光層との密着性の観点から、金属酸化物粒子、又は、有機粒子であることが好ましく、Si、Ti及びZrよりなる群から選択される元素の酸化物粒子、又は、有機粒子であることがより好ましい。
 なお、本開示における金属酸化物粒子の金属には、B、Si、Ge、As、Sb、Te等の半金属も含まれるものとする。
 金属酸化物粒子としては、Be、Mg、Ca、Sr、Ba、Sc、Y、La、Ce、Gd、Tb、Dy、Yb、Lu、Ti、Zr、Hf、Nb、Mo、W、Zn、B、Al、Si、Ge、Sn、Pb、Sb、Bi、Te等の原子を含む酸化物粒子が好ましく、シリカ、酸化チタン、チタン複合酸化物、酸化亜鉛、酸化ジルコニウム、インジウム/スズ酸化物、又は、アンチモン/スズ酸化物がより好ましく、シリカ、酸化チタン、チタン複合酸化物、又は、酸化ジルコニウムが更に好ましく、シリカ、酸化チタン、又は、酸化ジルコニウムが特に好ましい。
 有機粒子としては、有機樹脂粒子が好ましく挙げられる。
 有機樹脂粒子としては例えば、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸、アクリル酸エステル、メタクリル酸エステル等のアクリル酸系モノマーの単独重合体及び共重合体、ニトロセルロース、メチルセルロース、エチルセルロース、セルロースアセテートのようなセルロース系ポリマー、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、ポリスチレン、塩化ビニル系共重合体、塩化ビニル-酢酸ビニル共重合体、ポリビニルピロリドン、ポリビニルブチラール、ポリビニルアルコールのようなビニル系ポリマー及びビニル化合物の共重合体、ポリエステル、ポリウレタン、ポリアミドのような縮合系ポリマー、ブタジエン-スチレン共重合体のようなゴム系熱可塑性ポリマー、エポキシ化合物のような光重合性若しくは熱重合性化合物を重合、架橋させたポリマー、メラミン化合物等を挙げることができる。
 これらの中でも、有機粒子としては、アクリル樹脂粒子が好ましく挙げられ、ポリメチルメタクリレート粒子がより好ましく挙げられる。
 また、これら粒子は、分散安定性付与のために表面を有機材料や無機材料で処理することもできる。上記粒子は、表面が親水性の粒子であることが好ましい。例えば、表面が疎水性の粒子の表面を親水化処理する等が挙げられる。
-Particles having an arithmetic mean particle size of 400 nm or less-
The intermediate layer contains particles having an arithmetic mean particle size of 400 nm or less.
The particles are preferably metal oxide particles or organic particles from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer, and oxide particles of an element selected from the group consisting of Si, Ti and Zr Or, organic particles are more preferable.
Note that the metal of the metal oxide particles in the present disclosure includes semimetals such as B, Si, Ge, As, Sb, and Te.
As metal oxide particles, Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Sc, Y, La, Ce, Gd, Tb, Dy, Yb, Lu, Ti, Zr, Hf, Nb, Mo, W, Zn, B And oxide particles containing atoms such as Al, Si, Ge, Sn, Pb, Sb, Bi, Te, etc. are preferable, and silica, titanium oxide, titanium composite oxide, zinc oxide, zirconium oxide, indium / tin oxide, or Antimony / tin oxide is more preferable, silica, titanium oxide, titanium complex oxide or zirconium oxide is more preferable, and silica, titanium oxide or zirconium oxide is particularly preferable.
As the organic particles, organic resin particles are preferably mentioned.
Examples of organic resin particles include homopolymers and copolymers of acrylic acid monomers such as acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, acrylic acid esters and methacrylic acid esters, and cellulose polymers such as nitrocellulose, methyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate , Polyethylene, polypropylene, polystyrene, vinyl chloride copolymer, vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate copolymer, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, polyvinyl butyral, copolymer of vinyl polymer such as polyvinyl alcohol and vinyl compound, polyester, polyurethane, polyamide Condensation polymers, rubber-based thermoplastic polymers such as butadiene-styrene copolymers, polymers obtained by polymerizing and crosslinking photopolymerizable or thermally polymerizable compounds such as epoxy compounds, Min compounds and the like.
Among these, acrylic resin particles are preferably mentioned as the organic particles, and polymethyl methacrylate particles are more preferably mentioned.
In addition, these particles can also be treated with an organic material or an inorganic material on the surface to impart dispersion stability. The particles are preferably particles having a hydrophilic surface. For example, the surface of the particles having a hydrophobic surface is subjected to a hydrophilization treatment, and the like.
 上記粒子の算術平均粒子径は、400nm以下であり、中間層と感光層との密着性の観点から、250nm以下であることが好ましく、200nm以下であることがより好ましく、150nm以下であることが更に好ましく、10nm~150nmであることが特に好ましい。
 本開示における粒子の算術平均粒子径の測定方法は、電子顕微鏡により任意の粒子200個の粒子径を測定し、その算術平均をいう。また、粒子の形状が球形でない場合には、最大径を径とする。
The arithmetic mean particle diameter of the above particles is 400 nm or less, preferably 250 nm or less, more preferably 200 nm or less, and 150 nm or less from the viewpoint of the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer. More preferably, it is particularly preferably 10 nm to 150 nm.
The method of measuring the arithmetic mean particle size of particles in the present disclosure measures the particle size of 200 arbitrary particles by an electron microscope, and refers to the arithmetic mean. Also, when the shape of the particles is not spherical, the maximum diameter is taken as the diameter.
 上記中間層における上記粒子の体積分率(中間層における粒子が占める体積割合)は、中間層と感光層との密着性の観点から、中間層の全体積に対し、5%~90%であることが好ましく、10%~80%であることがより好ましく、15%~70%であることが更に好ましく、20%~60%であることが特に好ましい。
 後述するように、中間層を2層にする場合には、全中間層における上記粒子の体積分率(中間層における粒子が占める体積割合)は、中間層と感光層との密着性の観点から、中間層の全体積に対し、2%~90%であることが好ましく、3%~80%であることがより好ましく、5%~20%であることが更に好ましく、10%~20%であることが特に好ましい。
The volume fraction of the particles in the intermediate layer (the volume ratio of particles in the intermediate layer) is 5% to 90% of the total volume of the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer 10% to 80% is more preferable, 15% to 70% is more preferable, and 20% to 60% is particularly preferable.
As described later, when the intermediate layer is formed into two layers, the volume fraction of the particles in all the intermediate layers (the volume ratio occupied by the particles in the intermediate layer) is from the viewpoint of the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer. Preferably 2% to 90%, more preferably 3% to 80%, still more preferably 5% to 20%, and still more preferably 10% to 20% of the total volume of the intermediate layer. Being particularly preferred.
-その他の添加剤-
 本開示における上記中間層は、バインダー及び上記粒子に加え、必要に応じて公知の添加剤を含むことができる。
 その他の添加剤としては、後述する感光層に用いられるその他の添加剤が好適に挙げられる。
-Other additives-
The intermediate layer in the present disclosure can contain, if necessary, known additives in addition to the binder and the particles.
As other additives, other additives used for the photosensitive layer described later are preferably mentioned.
-中間層の構成-
 上記中間層は、2層以上の層を有していてもよく、上記中間層が2層以上の層により形成されている場合、中間層と仮支持体との密着性、及び、中間層と感光層とのそれぞれへの密着性の観点から、2層~5層により形成されていることが好ましく、2層又は3層により形成されていることがより好ましく、2層により形成されていることが特に好ましい。
 上記中間層が2層以上の層を有する場合、水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性のバインダーをそれぞれの層に含有することが好ましく、また、各層において同種のバインダーを用いてもよく、異なるバインダーを用いてもよい。
 上記中間層が2層以上の層を有する場合、上記算術平均粒子径が400nm以下である粒子は複数の層に含有されていてもよいが、中間層と感光層との密着性の観点から、感光層に最も近い層に含有されていることが好ましい。
 また、仮支持体と中間層との密着性の観点から、上記算術平均粒子径が400nm以下である粒子は、上記中間層における2層以上の層のうち、仮支持体に最も近い層に含有していないことが好ましい。すなわち、上記算術平均粒子径が400nm以下である粒子は、上記中間層における2層以上の層のうち、感光層に最も近い層にのみ含有されていることがより好ましい。
 なお、例えば、感光性転写材料において、中間層と感光層とが接している場合、「上記中間層における2層以上の層のうち、感光層に最も近い層」は、「上記中間層における2層以上の層のうち、感光層と接している層」に該当する。
-Composition of the middle layer-
The intermediate layer may have two or more layers, and when the intermediate layer is formed of two or more layers, adhesion between the intermediate layer and the temporary support, and the intermediate layer From the viewpoint of adhesion to each of the photosensitive layers, it is preferably formed of 2 to 5 layers, more preferably formed of 2 or 3 layers, and formed of 2 layers Is particularly preferred.
When the intermediate layer has two or more layers, it is preferable to contain a water-soluble or alkali-soluble binder in each layer, and the same type of binder may be used in each layer, and different binders may be used. Good.
When the intermediate layer has two or more layers, particles having an arithmetic average particle diameter of 400 nm or less may be contained in a plurality of layers, but from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer, It is preferable to be contained in the layer closest to the photosensitive layer.
In addition, from the viewpoint of adhesion between the temporary support and the intermediate layer, particles having an arithmetic average particle diameter of 400 nm or less are contained in the layer closest to the temporary support among two or more layers in the intermediate layer. Preferably not. That is, the particles having an arithmetic average particle diameter of 400 nm or less are more preferably contained only in the layer closest to the photosensitive layer among the two or more layers in the intermediate layer.
For example, in the photosensitive transfer material, when the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer are in contact with each other, “the layer closest to the photosensitive layer among the two or more layers in the intermediate layer” is “the layer in the intermediate layer It corresponds to "the layer in contact with the photosensitive layer" among the layers above.
-中間層の平均膜厚-
 上記中間層の平均膜厚は、中間層と感光層との密着性、及び、パターン形成性の観点から、0.3μm~10μmが好ましく、0.3μm~5μmがより好ましく、0.3μm~2μmが特に好ましい。
 本開示における各層の平均膜厚の測定方法は、特に制限はなく、公知の方法を用いることができる。また、平均値は10点以上測定し算出することが好ましい。
 具体的には例えば、表面形状測定や、断面の光学顕微鏡又は電子顕微鏡観察等が挙げられる。また、表面形状測定には、ブルカー社製Dektakシリーズを好適に使用することができる。また、断面観察には、走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)を好適に用いることができる。
 また、上記中間層の厚みは、上記感光層の厚みより薄いことが好ましい。
-Average film thickness of middle layer-
The average film thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably 0.3 μm to 10 μm, more preferably 0.3 μm to 5 μm, and further preferably 0.3 μm to 2 μm, from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer and pattern formability. Is particularly preferred.
The measuring method of the average film thickness of each layer in this indication does not have a restriction | limiting in particular, A well-known method can be used. Moreover, it is preferable to measure and calculate an average value 10 points or more.
Specifically, for example, surface shape measurement, optical microscope observation of a cross section, electron microscope observation and the like can be mentioned. Further, for surface profile measurement, Dektak series manufactured by Bruker can be suitably used. In addition, a scanning electron microscope (SEM) can be suitably used for cross-sectional observation.
The thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably smaller than the thickness of the photosensitive layer.
 上記中間層が2層以上の層を有する場合、各層の平均膜厚は上記範囲内であれば特に限定されないが、上記中間層における2層以上の層のうち、感光層に最も近い層の平均膜厚は、中間層と感光層との密着性、及び、パターン形成性の観点から、0.3μm~10μmが好ましく、0.3μm~5μmがより好ましく、0.3μm~2.0μmが特に好ましい。 When the intermediate layer has two or more layers, the average film thickness of each layer is not particularly limited as long as it is within the above range, but of the two or more layers in the intermediate layer, the average of the layers closest to the photosensitive layer The film thickness is preferably 0.3 μm to 10 μm, more preferably 0.3 μm to 5 μm, and particularly preferably 0.3 μm to 2.0 μm from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer and pattern formability. .
-中間層の形成方法-
 中間層の形成方法は、特に制限はないが、各成分、及び、溶剤(好ましくは、水系溶剤)を所定の割合でかつ任意の方法で混合し、撹拌溶解して中間層を形成するための中間層形成用組成物を調製することができる。例えば、各成分を、それぞれ予め溶剤に溶解させた溶液とした後、得られた溶液を所定の割合で混合して組成物を調製することもできる。以上の如くして調製した組成物は、孔径5μmのフィルター等を用いてろ過した後に、使用に供することもできる。
 水系溶剤としては、水や、アルコール類等の水溶性溶剤が挙げられる。
-Method of forming the intermediate layer-
The formation method of the intermediate layer is not particularly limited, but the respective components and a solvent (preferably, an aqueous solvent) are mixed in a predetermined ratio and in an arbitrary method, stirred and dissolved to form the intermediate layer A composition for forming an intermediate layer can be prepared. For example, after preparing each solution as a solution in which each component is previously dissolved in a solvent, the resulting solution can be mixed at a predetermined ratio to prepare a composition. The composition prepared as described above can also be used after being filtered using a filter with a pore diameter of 5 μm or the like.
Examples of the aqueous solvent include water and water-soluble solvents such as alcohols.
 中間層形成用組成物を仮支持体に塗布し、乾燥させることで、仮支持体上に中間層を容易に形成することができる。
 塗布方法は特に限定されず、スリット塗布、スピン塗布、カーテン塗布、インクジェット塗布などの公知の方法で塗布することができる。
 なお、仮支持体上に後述のその他の層(例えば、熱可塑性樹脂層等)を形成した上に、中間層を塗布することもできる。
The intermediate layer can be easily formed on the temporary support by applying the composition for forming an intermediate layer to the temporary support and drying it.
The coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, or ink jet coating.
In addition, after forming the below-mentioned other layers (for example, thermoplastic resin layer etc.) on a temporary support body, an intermediate | middle layer can also be apply | coated.
<感光層>
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、仮支持体、中間層、及び、感光層をこの順で有する。
 また、本開示における感光層は、ポジ型感光層であっても、ネガ型感光性であってもよい。
 ポジ型感光層である場合、感光層は、化学増幅ポジ型感光層であることが好ましい。
 後述するオニウム塩やオキシムスルホネート化合物等の光酸発生剤は、活性放射線(活性光線)に感応して生成される酸が、酸分解性で保護された酸基を有するバインダー中の保護された酸基の脱保護に対して触媒として作用するので、1個の光量子の作用で生成した酸が、多数の脱保護反応に寄与し、量子収率は1を超え、例えば、10の数乗のような大きい値となり、いわゆる化学増幅の結果として、高感度が得られる。
 一方、活性放射線に感応する光酸発生剤としてキノンジアジド化合物(NQD)を用いた場合、逐次型光化学反応によりカルボキシ基を生成するが、その量子収率は必ず1以下であり、化学増幅型には該当しない。
<Photosensitive layer>
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive layer in this order.
In addition, the photosensitive layer in the present disclosure may be a positive photosensitive layer or may be negative photosensitive.
When it is a positive photosensitive layer, the photosensitive layer is preferably a chemically amplified positive photosensitive layer.
A photoacid generator such as an onium salt or an oxime sulfonate compound, which will be described later, is a protected acid in a binder having an acid degradable protected acid group in which an acid generated in response to actinic radiation (actinic ray) is generated. Since it acts as a catalyst for group deprotection, an acid generated by the action of one photon contributes to a large number of deprotection reactions, and the quantum yield is more than 1, for example, to a power of 10 High sensitivity is obtained as a result of so-called chemical amplification.
On the other hand, when a quinonediazide compound (NQD) is used as a photoacid generator sensitive to actinic radiation, a carboxy group is produced by successive photochemical reactions, but the quantum yield is necessarily 1 or less, and the chemical amplification type is Not applicable.
 上記感光層がポジ型感光層である場合、上記感光層は、パターン形成性の観点から、バインダー、及び、光酸発生剤を含有することが好ましい。また、上記バインダーは、パターン形成性の観点から、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有するバインダーを含有することが好ましく、酸分解性で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を有する重合体を含有することがより好ましい。
 また、上記感光層がネガ型感光層である場合、上記感光層は、パターン形成性の観点から、酸基を有するバインダー、重合性化合物、及び、光重合開始剤を含有することが好ましい。
When the photosensitive layer is a positive photosensitive layer, the photosensitive layer preferably contains a binder and a photoacid generator from the viewpoint of pattern formability. In addition, the binder preferably contains a binder having an acid-degradable group-protected acid group from the viewpoint of pattern formability, and a polymer having a structural unit having an acid-degradable protected acid group It is more preferable to contain
When the photosensitive layer is a negative photosensitive layer, the photosensitive layer preferably contains a binder having an acid group, a polymerizable compound, and a photopolymerization initiator from the viewpoint of pattern formation.
-酸分解性で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を有する重合体を含む重合体成分-
 上記感光層は、酸分解性で保護された酸基を有する構成単位(「構成単位A」ともいう。)を有する重合体(「特定重合体」ともいう。)を含む。
 また、上記感光層は、構成単位Aを有する重合体に加え、他の重合体を含んでいてもよい。本開示においては、構成単位Aを有する重合体及び他の重合体をあわせて、「重合体成分」ともいう。
 上記特定重合体は、露光により生じる触媒量の酸性物質の作用により、特定重合体中の酸分解性で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aが脱保護反応を受け酸基となる。この酸基により、硬化反応が可能となる。
 以下に構成単位Aの好ましい態様について説明する。
-Polymer component including a polymer having a structural unit having an acid-degradable protected acid group-
The photosensitive layer contains a polymer (also referred to as a “specific polymer”) having a structural unit (also referred to as “structural unit A”) having an acid-degradable protected acid group.
In addition to the polymer having the structural unit A, the photosensitive layer may contain other polymers. In the present disclosure, the polymer having the structural unit A and the other polymers are collectively referred to as a “polymer component”.
In the specific polymer, the structural unit A having an acid-degradable protected acid group in the specific polymer is subjected to a deprotecting reaction by the action of a catalytic amount of an acidic substance generated by exposure to light, thereby becoming an acid group. This acid group enables a curing reaction.
The preferable aspect of the structural unit A is demonstrated below.
 上記感光層は、更に、酸分解性で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を有する重合体以外の重合体を含んでいてもよい。
 また、上記重合体成分に含まれる全ての重合体がそれぞれ、後述する酸基を有する構成単位を少なくとも有する重合体であることが好ましい。
 また、上記感光層は、更に、これら以外の重合体を含んでいてもよい。本開示における上記重合体成分は、特に述べない限り、必要に応じて添加される他の重合体を含めたものを意味するものとする。なお、後述する架橋剤及び分散剤に該当する化合物は、高分子化合物であっても、上記重合体成分に含まないものとする。
The photosensitive layer may further contain a polymer other than the polymer having a structural unit having an acid-degradable protected acid group.
Moreover, it is preferable that all the polymers contained in the said polymer component are polymers which each have a structural unit which has an acidic radical mentioned later at least.
In addition, the photosensitive layer may further contain a polymer other than these. The above-mentioned polymer component in the present disclosure is intended to mean one including other polymers added as needed, unless otherwise stated. In addition, even if it is a high molecular compound, the compound applicable to the crosslinking agent and dispersing agent mentioned later shall not be contained in the said polymer component.
 特定重合体は、付加重合型の樹脂であることが好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸又はそのエステルに由来する構成単位を有する重合体であることがより好ましい。なお、(メタ)アクリル酸又はそのエステルに由来する構成単位以外の構成単位、例えば、スチレンに由来する構成単位や、ビニル化合物に由来する構成単位等を有していてもよい。 The specific polymer is preferably a resin of addition polymerization type, and more preferably a polymer having a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid or an ester thereof. In addition, you may have structural units other than (meth) acrylic acid or structural units derived from its ester, for example, a structural unit derived from styrene, a structural unit derived from a vinyl compound, etc.
 上記感光層は、パターン形状の変形抑制、現像液への溶解性及び転写性の観点から、重合体成分として、上記構成単位Aとして下記式A1で表される構成単位A1を有する重合体を含むことが好ましく、重合体成分として、上記構成単位Aとして下記式Aで表される構成単位A1を有し、かつガラス転移温度が90℃以下である特定重合体を含むことが好ましく、重合体成分として、上記構成単位Aとして下記式A1で表される構成単位A1、及び、後述する酸基を有する構成単位Bを有し、かつガラス転移温度が90℃以下である特定重合体を含むことが更に好ましい。
 上記感光層に含まれる特定重合体は、1種のみであっても、2種以上であってもよい。
The photosensitive layer contains a polymer having a structural unit A1 represented by the following formula A1 as the structural unit A as a polymer component from the viewpoint of suppressing deformation of a pattern shape, solubility in a developer and transferability. It is preferable that the polymer component contains a specific polymer having a constituent unit A1 represented by the following formula A as the constituent unit A and having a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or less, As the structural unit A, a specific polymer having a structural unit A1 represented by the following formula A1 and a structural unit B having an acid group described later and having a glass transition temperature of 90.degree. C. or less More preferable.
The specific polymer contained in the photosensitive layer may be only one type, or two or more types.
<<構成単位A>>
 上記重合体成分は、酸分解性で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aを少なくとも有する重合体を含む。上記重合体成分が構成単位Aを有する重合体を含むことにより、極めて高感度な化学増幅ポジ型の感光層とすることができる。
 本開示における「酸分解性で保護された酸基」は、酸基及び酸分解性基として公知のものを使用でき、特に限定されない。具体的な酸基としては、カルボキシ基、及び、フェノール性水酸基が好ましく挙げられる。また、酸分解性で保護された酸基としては、酸により比較的分解し易い基(例えば、式A1で表される基で保護されたエステル基、テトラヒドロピラニルエステル基、又は、テトラヒドロフラニルエステル基等のアセタール系官能基)や酸により比較的分解し難い基(例えば、tert-ブチルエステル基等の第三級アルキル基、tert-ブチルカーボネート基等の第三級アルキルカーボネート基)を用いることができる。
 これらの中でも、上記酸分解性基としては、アセタールの形で保護された構造を有する基であることが好ましい。
<< Constituent Unit A >>
The polymer component includes a polymer having at least a constituent unit A having an acid-degradable protected acid group. When the polymer component contains a polymer having the structural unit A, it is possible to obtain a highly sensitive chemically amplified positive type photosensitive layer.
As the "acid-degradable and protected acid group" in the present disclosure, those known as an acid group and an acid-degradable group can be used without particular limitation. As a specific acid group, a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxyl group are preferably mentioned. Moreover, as the acid-degradable protected acid group, a group which is relatively easy to be decomposed by an acid (for example, an ester group protected by a group represented by the formula A1, a tetrahydropyranyl ester group, or a tetrahydrofuranyl ester group) And the like (acetal functional groups such as, etc.) and groups which are relatively difficult to be decomposed by acid (for example, tertiary alkyl groups such as tert-butyl ester group, tertiary alkyl carbonate groups such as tert-butyl carbonate group) it can.
Among these, as the above-mentioned acid-decomposable group, a group having a structure protected in the form of acetal is preferable.
<<構成単位A>>
 上記酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aは、感度及び解像度の観点から、下記式A1で表される構成単位A1であることが好ましい。
<< Constituent Unit A >>
The structural unit A having an acid group which is protected by an acid decomposable group is preferably a structural unit A1 represented by the following formula A1 from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
 式A1中、R31及びR32はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、少なくともR31及びR32のいずれか一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、R33はアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R31又はR32と、R33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xは単結合又はアリーレン基を表す。 In formula A1, R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 31 and R 32 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 33 is an alkyl group or R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may combine to form a cyclic ether, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X 0 represents a single bond or an arylene group.
 式A1中、R31又はR32がアルキル基の場合、炭素数は1~10のアルキル基が好ましい。R31又はR32がアリール基の場合、フェニル基が好ましい。R31及びR32は、それぞれ、水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基が好ましい。
 式A1中、R33は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキル基がより好ましい。
 また、R31~R33におけるアルキル基及びアリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 式A1中、R31又はR32と、R33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R31又はR32と、R33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成することが好ましい。環状エーテルの環員数は特に制限はないが、5又は6であることが好ましく、5であることがより好ましい。
 式A1中、Xは単結合又はアリーレン基を表し、単結合が好ましい。アリーレン基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 上記式A1で表される構成単位A1は、酸分解性基で保護されたカルボキシ基を有する構成単位である。特定重合体が式A1で表される構成単位A1を含むことで、パターン形成時の感度に優れ、また、解像度より優れる。
In the formula A1, when R 31 or R 32 is an alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable. When R 31 or R 32 is an aryl group, a phenyl group is preferred. Each of R 31 and R 32 is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
In Formula A1, R 33 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
In addition, the alkyl group and the aryl group in R 31 to R 33 may have a substituent.
In formula A1, R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and it is preferable that R 31 or R 32 and R 33 link to form a cyclic ether. The number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
In formula A1, X 0 represents a single bond or an arylene group, and a single bond is preferred. The arylene group may have a substituent.
The constituent unit A1 represented by the formula A1 is a constituent unit having a carboxy group protected by an acid decomposable group. When the specific polymer contains the structural unit A1 represented by the formula A1, the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation is excellent, and is superior to the resolution.
 式A1中、R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、特定重合体のTgをより低くし得るという観点から、水素原子であることが好ましい。
 より具体的には、特定重合体に含まれる構成単位A1の全量に対し、式AにおけるR34が水素原子である構成単位は20質量%以上であることが好ましい。
 なお、構成単位A1中の、式A1におけるR34が水素原子である構成単位の含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-核磁気共鳴スペクトル(NMR)測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
In formula A1, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint of being able to lower the Tg of the specific polymer.
More specifically, with respect to the total amount of the structural units A1 contained in the specific polymer is preferably the structural unit R 34 in formula A is a hydrogen atom is at least 20 mass%.
Incidentally, in the structural unit A1, the content of the structural unit R 34 is a hydrogen atom in the formula A1 (content: weight ratio) is calculated by the usual method from the 13 C- nuclear magnetic resonance spectra (NMR) measurements It can confirm by intensity ratio of peak intensity.
 式A1で表される構成単位A1の中でも、下記式A2で表される構成単位が、パターン形成時の感度を更に高める観点からより好ましい。 Among the structural units A1 represented by the formula A1, structural units represented by the following formula A2 are more preferable from the viewpoint of further enhancing the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
 式A2中、R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、R35~R41はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表す。
 式A2中、R34は水素原子が好ましい。
 式A2中、R35~R41は、水素原子が好ましい。
In formula A2, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and R 35 to R 41 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
In formula A2, R 34 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
In formula A2, R 35 to R 41 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
 式A1で表される、酸分解性基で保護されたカルボキシ基を有する構成単位A1の好ましい具体例としては、下記の構成単位が例示できる。なお、R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表す。 The following structural unit can be illustrated as a preferable specific example of structural unit A1 which has a carboxy group protected with an acid degradable group represented by Formula A1. R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
 また、上記構成単位Aとしては、パターン形状の変形抑制の観点から、下記式A3で表される構成単位が好ましい。 The structural unit A is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula A3 from the viewpoint of suppressing deformation of the pattern shape.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
 式A3中、RB1及びRB2はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、少なくともRB1及びRB2のいずれか一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、RB3はアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、RB1又はRB2と、RB3とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、RB4は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xは単結合又は二価の連結基を表し、RB12は置換基を表し、nは0~4の整数を表す。 In formula A3, R B1 and R B2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R B1 and R B2 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R B3 is an alkyl group or R B1 or R B2 and R B3 may combine to form a cyclic ether, R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X B is a single bond or a divalent linking group. R B12 represents a substituent, and n represents an integer of 0 to 4.
 式A3中、RB1又はRB2がアルキル基の場合、炭素数は1~10のアルキル基が好ましい。RB1又はRB2がアリール基の場合、フェニル基が好ましい。RB1及びRB2は、それぞれ、水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基が好ましい。
 式A3中、RB3は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキル基がより好ましい。
 また、RB1~RB3におけるアルキル基及びアリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 式A3中、RB1又はRB2と、RB3とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、RB1又はRB2と、RB3とが連結して環状エーテルを形成することが好ましい。環状エーテルの環員数は特に制限はないが、5又は6であることが好ましく、5であることがより好ましい。
 式A3中、Xは単結合又は二価の連結基を表し、単結合又はアルキレン基、-C(=O)O-、-C(=O)NR-、-O-又はこれらの組み合わせが好ましく、単結合がより好ましい。アルキレン基は、直鎖状でも分岐を有していても環状構造を有していてもよく、置換基を有していてもよい。アルキレン基の炭素数は1~10が好ましく、1~4がより好ましい。Xが-C(=O)O-を含む場合、-C(=O)O-に含まれる炭素原子と、RB4が結合した炭素原子とが直接結合する態様が好ましい。Xが-C(=O)NR-を含む場合、-C(=O)NR-に含まれる炭素原子と、RB4が結合した炭素原子とが直接結合する態様が好ましい。Rはアルキル基又は水素原子を表し、炭素数1~4のアルキル基又は水素原子が好ましく、水素原子がより好ましい。
 式A3中、RB1~RB3を含む基と、Xとは、互いにパラ位で結合することが好ましい。
 式A3中、RB12は置換基を表し、アルキル基又はハロゲン原子が好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~4がより好ましい。
 式A3中、nは0~4の整数を表し、0又は1が好ましく、0がより好ましい。
In the formula A3, when R B1 or R B2 is an alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable. When R B1 or R B2 is an aryl group, a phenyl group is preferred. Each of R B1 and R B2 is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
In formula A3, R B3 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
In addition, the alkyl group and the aryl group in R B1 to R B3 may have a substituent.
In formula A3, R B1 or R B2 and R B3 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and R B1 or R B2 and R B3 are preferably linked to form a cyclic ether. The number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
In formula A3, X B represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and is a single bond or an alkylene group, -C (= O) O-, -C (= O) NR N- , -O- or a combination thereof Is preferred, and a single bond is more preferred. The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic and may have a substituent. The carbon number of the alkylene group is preferably 1 to 10, and more preferably 1 to 4. When X B contains —C (-O) O—, an embodiment in which the carbon atom contained in —C (= O) O— and the carbon atom to which R B4 is bonded is directly bonded is preferable. When containing, -C (= O) NR N - - is X B -C (= O) NR N and carbon atoms contained in a mode in which the carbon atom to which R B4 is bonded is directly bonded is preferable. R N represents an alkyl group or a hydrogen atom, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms or a hydrogen atom, and more preferably a hydrogen atom.
In formula A3, the group containing R B1 to R B3 and X B are preferably bonded to each other in the para position.
In formula A3, R B12 represents a substituent, preferably an alkyl group or a halogen atom. The carbon number of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, and more preferably 1 to 4.
In formula A3, n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
 式A3中、RB4は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、特定重合体のTgをより低くし得るという観点から、水素原子であることが好ましい。
 より具体的には、特定重合体に含まれる構成単位Aの全含有量に対し、式A3におけるRB4が水素原子である構成単位は20質量%以上であることが好ましい。
 なお、構成単位A中の、式A3におけるRB4が水素原子である構成単位の含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-核磁気共鳴スペクトル(NMR)測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
In formula A3, R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint of being able to lower the Tg of the specific polymer.
More specifically, it is preferable that the structural unit whose R B4 in the formula A3 is a hydrogen atom is 20% by mass or more with respect to the total content of the structural unit A contained in the specific polymer.
In addition, the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the constituent unit in which R B4 in the formula A3 is a hydrogen atom in the constituent unit A is calculated according to a conventional method from 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum (NMR) measurement. It can confirm by intensity ratio of peak intensity.
 式A3で表される構成単位の中でも、パターン形状の変形抑制の観点から、下記式A4で表される構成単位がより好ましい。 Among the structural units represented by Formula A3, the structural unit represented by the following Formula A4 is more preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing deformation of the pattern shape.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
 式A4中、RB4は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、RB5~RB11はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、RB12は置換基を表し、nは0~4の整数を表す。
 式A4中、RB4は水素原子が好ましい。
 式A4中、RB5~RB11は、水素原子が好ましい。
 式A4中、RB12は置換基を表し、アルキル基又はハロゲン原子が好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~4がより好ましい。
 式A4中、nは0~4の整数を表し、0又は1が好ましく、0がより好ましい。
In formula A4, R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R B5 to R B11 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, R B12 represents a substituent, and n is 0 Represents an integer of ~ 4.
In formula A4, R B4 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
In formula A4, R B5 to R B11 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
In formula A4, R B12 represents a substituent, preferably an alkyl group or a halogen atom. The carbon number of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, and more preferably 1 to 4.
In formula A4, n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
 式A4で表される構成単位A4の好ましい具体例としては、下記の構成単位が例示できる。なお、RB4は水素原子又はメチル基を表す。 The following structural unit can be illustrated as a preferable specific example of structural unit A4 represented by Formula A4. R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 特定重合体に含まれる構成単位Aは、1種であっても、2種以上であってもよい。
 特定重合体における構成単位Aの含有量は、特定重合体の全質量に対して、20質量%以上であることが好ましく、20質量%~90質量%であることがより好ましく、30質量%~70質量%であることが更に好ましい。
 特定重合体における構成単位Aの含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
 また、全ての重合体成分を構成単位(モノマー単位)に分解したうえで、構成単位Aの割合は、重合体成分の全質量に対して、5質量%~80質量%であることが好ましく、10質量%~80質量%であることがより好ましく、30質量%~70質量%であることが特に好ましい。
The constituent unit A contained in the specific polymer may be one type or two or more types.
The content of the structural unit A in the specific polymer is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 20% by mass to 90% by mass, and more preferably 30% by mass to the total mass of the specific polymer. More preferably, it is 70% by mass.
The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit A in the specific polymer can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of peak intensities calculated from 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method.
Further, the ratio of the structural unit A is preferably 5% by mass to 80% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer component after all the polymer components are decomposed into constituent units (monomer units). The content is more preferably 10% by mass to 80% by mass, and particularly preferably 30% by mass to 70% by mass.
<<構成単位B>>
 上記特定重合体は、酸基を有する構成単位Bを含むことが好ましい。
 構成単位Bは、保護基、例えば、酸分解性基で保護されていない酸基、すなわち、保護基を有さない酸基を含む構成単位である。特定重合体が構成単位Bを含むことで、パターン形成時の感度が良好となり、パターン露光後の現像工程においてアルカリ性の現像液に溶けやすくなり、現像時間の短縮化を図ることができる。
 本明細書における酸基とは、pKaが12以下のプロトン解離性基を意味する。酸基は、通常、酸基を形成しうるモノマーを用いて、酸基を含む構成単位(構成単位B)として、重合体に組み込まれる。感度向上の観点から、酸基のpKaは、10以下が好ましく、6以下がより好ましい。また、酸基のpKaは、-5以上であることが好ましい。
<< Constituent Unit B >>
It is preferable that the said specific polymer contains the structural unit B which has an acidic radical.
The structural unit B is a structural unit that includes a protective group, for example, an acid group that is not protected by an acid-degradable group, that is, an acidic group that does not have a protective group. When the specific polymer contains the structural unit B, the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation becomes good, and it becomes easily soluble in an alkaline developer in the development step after pattern exposure, and the development time can be shortened.
The term "acid group" as used herein means a proton dissociative group having a pKa of 12 or less. The acid group is usually incorporated into the polymer as a structural unit (structural unit B) containing an acid group, using a monomer capable of forming an acid group. From the viewpoint of sensitivity improvement, the pKa of the acid group is preferably 10 or less, and more preferably 6 or less. The pKa of the acid group is preferably -5 or more.
 特定重合体が、構成単位Aと、保護基で保護されていない酸基を有する構成単位Bとを共重合成分として含み、ガラス転移温度を90℃以下とすることで、特定重合体を含有するポジ型感光層は、転写性、仮支持体からの剥離性を良好なレベルに維持しつつ、パターン形成時の解像度及び感度がより良好となる。 A specific polymer contains a specific polymer by containing the structural unit A and the structural unit B which has an acidic group which is not protected by a protecting group as a copolymerization component, and setting a glass transition temperature to 90 degrees C or less. The positive photosensitive layer has better transferability and removability from the temporary support while maintaining good resolution and sensitivity during pattern formation.
 上記酸基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホンアミド基、ホスホン酸基、スルホン酸基、フェノール性水酸基(フェノール性ヒドロキシ基)、及び、スルホニルイミド基等が例示される。中でも、カルボン酸基(カルボキシ基)及びフェノール性水酸基よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の酸基が好ましい。
 特定重合体への酸基を有する構成単位の導入は、酸基を有するモノマーを共重合させることで行うことができる。
 構成単位Bである、酸基を含む構成単位は、スチレンに由来する構成単位若しくはビニル化合物に由来する構成単位に対して酸基が置換した構成単位、又は、(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位であることがより好ましい。
Examples of the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfonamide group, a phosphonic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phenolic hydroxyl group (phenolic hydroxy group), and a sulfonylimide group. Among them, at least one acid group selected from the group consisting of a carboxylic acid group (carboxy group) and a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable.
The introduction of a structural unit having an acid group into a specific polymer can be carried out by copolymerizing a monomer having an acid group.
The structural unit containing an acid group, which is the structural unit B, is a structural unit derived from styrene or a structural unit derived from a vinyl compound, or a structural unit derived from a (meth) acrylic acid. It is more preferable that it is a unit.
 構成単位Bとしては、カルボン酸基を有する構成単位、又は、フェノール性水酸基を有する構成単位が、パターン形成時の感度がより良好となるという観点から好ましい。
 構成単位Bを形成しうる酸基を有するモノマーは既述の例に限定されない。
As the structural unit B, a structural unit having a carboxylic acid group or a structural unit having a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable from the viewpoint that the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation is better.
The monomer having an acid group capable of forming the structural unit B is not limited to the examples described above.
 特定重合体に含まれる構成単位Bは、1種のみであっても、2種以上であってもよい。
 特定重合体は、特定重合体の全質量に対し、酸基を有する構成単位(構成単位B)を0.1質量%~20質量%含むことが好ましく、0.5質量%~15質量%含むことがより好ましく、1質量%~10質量%含むことが更に好ましい。上記範囲であると、パターン形成性がより良好となる。
 特定重合体における構成単位Bの含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
The constituent unit B contained in the specific polymer may be only one type or two or more types.
The specific polymer preferably contains 0.1% by mass to 20% by mass of a structural unit (structural unit B) having an acid group, based on the total mass of the specific polymer, and includes 0.5% by mass to 15% by mass Is more preferable, and 1% by mass to 10% by mass is more preferable. Within the above range, pattern formability becomes better.
The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit B in the specific polymer can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of peak intensities calculated from 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method.
<<その他の構成単位>>
 特定重合体は、既述の構成単位A及び構成単位B以外の、他の構成単位(以下、構成単位Cと称することがある。)を、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の効果を損なわない範囲で含んでいてもよい。
 構成単位Cを形成するモノマーとしては、特に制限はなく、例えば、スチレン類、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸環状アルキルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸アリールエステル、不飽和ジカルボン酸ジエステル、ビシクロ不飽和化合物、マレイミド化合物、不飽和芳香族化合物、共役ジエン系化合物、不飽和モノカルボン酸、不飽和ジカルボン酸、不飽和ジカルボン酸無水物、脂肪族環式骨格を有する基、その他の不飽和化合物を挙げることができる。
 構成単位Cを用いて、種類及び含有量の少なくともいずれかを調整することで、特定重合体の諸特性を調整することができる。特に、構成単位Cを適切に使用することで、特定重合体のTgを90℃以下に容易に調整することができる。
 特定重合体は、構成単位Cを1種のみ含んでもよく、2種以上含んでいてもよい。
<< Other composition unit >>
The specific polymer does not impair the effects of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure other structural units (hereinafter, may be referred to as structural unit C) other than the structural unit A and the structural unit B described above. You may include in the range.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a monomer which forms the structural unit C, For example, Styrenes, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid cyclic alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid aryl ester, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid diester , Bicyclo unsaturated compound, maleimide compound, unsaturated aromatic compound, conjugated diene compound, unsaturated monocarboxylic acid, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid anhydride, group having aliphatic cyclic skeleton, other unsaturated Saturated compounds can be mentioned.
Various properties of the specific polymer can be adjusted by adjusting at least one of the type and the content using the structural unit C. In particular, by appropriately using the structural unit C, the Tg of the specific polymer can be easily adjusted to 90 ° C. or less.
The specific polymer may contain only one type of the structural unit C, or may contain two or more types.
 構成単位Cは、具体的には、スチレン、tert-ブトキシスチレン、メチルスチレン、α-メチルスチレン、アセトキシスチレン、メトキシスチレン、エトキシスチレン、クロロスチレン、ビニル安息香酸メチル、ビニル安息香酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸ベンジル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソボルニル、アクリロニトリル、又は、エチレングリコールモノアセトアセテートモノ(メタ)アクリレートなどを重合して形成される構成単位を挙げることができる。その他、特開2004-264623号公報の段落0021~段落0024に記載の化合物を挙げることができる。 Specifically, structural unit C is styrene, tert-butoxystyrene, methylstyrene, α-methylstyrene, acetoxystyrene, methoxystyrene, ethoxystyrene, chlorostyrene, methyl vinyl benzoate, ethyl vinyl benzoate, (meth) Methyl acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) Examples thereof include structural units formed by polymerizing benzyl acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, acrylonitrile, or ethylene glycol monoacetoacetate mono (meth) acrylate. In addition, the compounds described in paragraphs 0021 to 0024 of JP-A-2004-264623 can be mentioned.
 また、構成単位Cとしては、芳香環を有する構成単位、又は、脂肪族環式骨格を有する構成単位が、得られる転写材料の電気特性を向上させる観点で好ましい。これら構成単位を形成するモノマーとして、具体的には、スチレン、tert-ブトキシスチレン、メチルスチレン、α-メチルスチレン、ジシクロペンタニル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、イソボルニル(メタ)アクリレート、及び、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。中でも、構成単位Cとしては、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位が好ましく挙げられる。 Further, as the structural unit C, a structural unit having an aromatic ring or a structural unit having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton is preferable from the viewpoint of improving the electrical properties of the transfer material to be obtained. Specifically as a monomer which forms these structural units, styrene, tert- butoxystyrene, methylstyrene, alpha-methylstyrene, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, And benzyl (meth) acrylate and the like. Among them, as the structural unit C, structural units derived from cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate are preferably mentioned.
 また、構成単位Cを形成するモノマーとしては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが、密着性の観点で好ましい。中でも、炭素数4~12のアルキル基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが密着性の観点でより好ましい。具体的には、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-ブチル、及び、(メタ)アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシルが挙げられる。 Moreover, as a monomer which forms the structural unit C, (meth) acrylic-acid alkylester is preferable in the adhesive viewpoint, for example. Among them, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion. Specific examples thereof include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate and 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate.
 構成単位Cの含有量は、特定重合体の全質量に対し、70質量%以下が好ましく、60質量%以下がより好ましく、50質量%以下が更に好ましい。下限値としては、0質量%でもよいが、1質量%以上であることが好ましく、5質量%以上であることがより好ましい。上記範囲であると、解像度及び密着性がより向上する。 70 mass% or less is preferable with respect to the total mass of a specific polymer, as for content of the structural unit C, 60 mass% or less is more preferable, and 50 mass% or less is still more preferable. The lower limit may be 0% by mass, but is preferably 1% by mass or more, and more preferably 5% by mass or more. Within the above range, resolution and adhesion are further improved.
 特定重合体が、構成単位Cとして、上記構成単位Bにおける酸基のエステルを有する構成単位を含むことも、現像液に対する溶解性、及び、上記感光層の物理物性を最適化する観点から好ましい。
 中でも、特定重合体は、構成単位Bとして、カルボン酸基を有する構成単位を含み、更に、カルボン酸エステル基を含む構成単位Cを共重合成分として含むことが好ましく、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸由来の構成単位Bと、(メタ)アクリル酸シクロヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシル又は(メタ)アクリル酸n-ブチル由来の構成単位(c)とを含む重合体がより好ましい。
 以下、本開示における特定重合体の好ましい例を挙げるが、本開示は以下の例示に限定されない。なお、下記例示化合物における構成単位の比率、重量平均分子量は、好ましい物性を得るために適宜選択される。
It is also preferable that the specific polymer contains a structural unit having an ester of an acid group in the structural unit B as the structural unit C from the viewpoint of optimizing the solubility in a developer and the physical properties of the photosensitive layer.
Among them, the specific polymer preferably contains, as the structural unit B, a structural unit having a carboxylic acid group, and further preferably contains a structural unit C containing a carboxylic acid ester group as a copolymerization component, for example, (meth) acrylic acid More preferred is a polymer containing the structural unit B derived from and a structural unit (c) derived from cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate or n-butyl (meth) acrylate.
Hereinafter, although the preferable example of the specific polymer in this indication is given, this indication is not limited to the following illustrations. In addition, the ratio of the structural unit in the following exemplary compounds and the weight average molecular weight are suitably selected in order to obtain preferable physical properties.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
<<重合体のガラス転移温度:Tg>>
 本開示における特定重合体のガラス転移温度(Tg)は、90℃以下であることが好ましい。Tgが90℃以下であることで、上記感光層は高い密着性を有し、転写性により優れる。
 上記Tgは、60℃以下であることがより好ましく、40℃以下であることが更に好ましい。
 また、上記Tgの下限値には特に制限はないが、-20℃以上が好ましく、-10℃以上がより好ましい。特定重合体のTgが-20℃以上であることで、良好なパターン形成性が維持され、また、例えば、カバーフィルムを用いる場合、カバーフィルムを剥離する際の剥離性低下が抑制される。
 更に、本開示における上記重合体成分全体のガラス転移温度(Tg)は、転写性の観点から、90℃以下であることが好ましく、60℃以下であることがより好ましく、40℃以下であることが更に好ましい。
<< Glass transition temperature of polymer: Tg >>
It is preferable that the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the specific polymer in this indication is 90 degrees C or less. When the Tg is 90 ° C. or less, the photosensitive layer has high adhesion and is more excellent in transferability.
The Tg is more preferably 60 ° C. or less, still more preferably 40 ° C. or less.
Further, the lower limit value of the above Tg is not particularly limited, but is preferably −20 ° C. or more, more preferably −10 ° C. or more. When the Tg of the specific polymer is −20 ° C. or higher, good pattern formability is maintained, and, for example, when a cover film is used, the decrease in peelability at the time of peeling the cover film is suppressed.
Furthermore, the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the entire polymer component in the present disclosure is preferably 90 ° C. or less, more preferably 60 ° C. or less, and 40 ° C. or less from the viewpoint of transferability. Is more preferred.
 重合体のガラス転移温度は、示差走査熱量測定(DSC)を用いて測定することができる。
 具体的な測定方法は、JIS K 7121(1987年)又はJIS K 6240(2011年)に記載の方法に順じて行った。本明細書におけるガラス転移温度は、補外ガラス転移開始温度(以下、Tigと称することがある)を用いている。
 ガラス転移温度の測定方法をより具体的に説明する。
 ガラス転移温度を求める場合、予想される重合体のTgより約 50℃低い温度にて装置が安定するまで保持した後、加熱速度:20℃/分で、ガラス転移が終了した温度よりも約30℃高い温度まで加熱し,DTA曲線又はDSC曲線を描かせる。
 補外ガラス転移開始温度(Tig)、すなわち、本明細書におけるガラス転移温度Tgは、DTA曲線又はDSC曲線における低温側のベースラインを高温側に延長した直線と、ガラス転移の階段状変化部分の曲線の勾配が最大になる点で引いた接線との交点の温度として求める。
The glass transition temperature of the polymer can be measured using differential scanning calorimetry (DSC).
The specific measuring method followed the method as described in JISK7121 (1987) or JISK6240 (2011). The glass transition temperature in the present specification uses an extrapolated glass transition start temperature (hereinafter sometimes referred to as Tig).
The method of measuring the glass transition temperature will be described more specifically.
When the glass transition temperature is determined, the temperature is maintained at about 50 ° C. lower than the expected polymer Tg until the device is stabilized, and then the heating rate: 20 ° C./min, about 30 at which the glass transition is completed. Heat to a high temperature and draw a DTA curve or a DSC curve.
Extrapolation glass transition start temperature (Tig), that is, the glass transition temperature Tg in the present specification, is a straight line extending the baseline on the low temperature side in the DTA curve or DSC curve to the high temperature side, and the step change portion of the glass transition It is determined as the temperature at the point of intersection with the tangent drawn at the point where the slope of the curve is at a maximum.
 重合体のTgを、既述の好ましい範囲に調整する方法としては、例えば、目的とする重合体の各構成単位の単独重合体のTgと各構成単位の質量比より、FOX式を指針にして、目的とする特定重合体のTgを制御することが可能である。
 FOX式について
 重合体に含まれる第1の構成単位の単独重合体のTgをTg1、第1の構成単位の共重合体における質量分率をW1とし、第2の構成単位の単独重合体のTgをTg2とし、第2の構成単位の共重合体における質量分率をW2としたときに、第1の構成単位と第2の構成単位とを含む共重合体のTg0(K)は、以下の式にしたがって推定することが可能である。
 FOX式:1/Tg0=(W1/Tg1)+(W2/Tg2)
 既述のFOX式を用いて、共重合体に含まれる各構成単位の種類と質量分率を調整して、所望のTgを有する共重合体を得ることができる。
 また、重合体の重量平均分子量を調整することにより、重合体のTgを調整することも可能である。
As a method of adjusting the Tg of the polymer to the preferable range described above, for example, the FOX formula is used as a guideline from the Tg of the homopolymer of each constitutional unit of the target polymer and the mass ratio of each constitutional unit It is possible to control the Tg of the target specific polymer.
Regarding FOX Formula The Tg of the homopolymer of the first constitutional unit contained in the polymer is Tg1, the mass fraction of the copolymer of the first constitutional unit is W1, and the Tg of the homopolymer of the second constitutional unit Is Tg2 and the mass fraction of the copolymer of the second structural unit is W2, the Tg0 (K) of the copolymer containing the first structural unit and the second structural unit is It is possible to estimate according to the equation.
FOX formula: 1 / Tg0 = (W1 / Tg1) + (W2 / Tg2)
The type and mass fraction of each structural unit contained in the copolymer can be adjusted using the above-described FOX formula to obtain a copolymer having a desired Tg.
Moreover, it is also possible to adjust Tg of a polymer by adjusting the weight average molecular weight of a polymer.
<<重合体の分子量:Mw>>
 特定重合体の分子量は、ポリスチレン換算重量平均分子量で、60,000以下であることが好ましい。特定重合体の重量平均分子量が60,000以下であることで、感光層の溶融粘度を低く抑え、上記基板と貼り合わせる際において低温(例えば130℃以下)での貼り合わせを実現することができる。
 また、特定重合体の重量平均分子量は、2,000~60,000であることが好ましく、3,000~50,000であることがより好ましい。
 なお、重合体の重量平均分子量は、GPC(ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー)によって測定することができ、測定装置としては、様々な市販の装置を用いることができ、装置の内容、及び、測定技術は当業者に公知である。
 ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)による重量平均分子量の測定は、測定装置として、HLC(登録商標)-8220GPC(東ソー(株)製)を用い、カラムとして、TSKgel(登録商標)Super HZM-M(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)、Super HZ4000(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)、Super HZ3000(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)、Super HZ2000(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)をそれぞれ1本、直列に連結したものを用い、溶離液として、THF(テトラヒドロフラン)を用いることができる。
 また、測定条件としては、試料濃度を0.2質量%、流速を0.35ml/min、サンプル注入量を10μl、及び測定温度を40℃とし、示差屈折率(RI)検出器を用いて行うことができる。
 検量線は、東ソー(株)製の「標準試料TSK standard,polystyrene」:「F-40」、「F-20」、「F-4」、「F-1」、「A-5000」、「A-2500」及び「A-1000」の7サンプルのいずれかを用いて作製できる。
<< molecular weight of polymer: Mw >>
The molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 60,000 or less in terms of weight average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene. When the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is 60,000 or less, the melt viscosity of the photosensitive layer can be suppressed low, and bonding at a low temperature (for example, 130 ° C. or less) can be realized when bonding to the substrate .
The weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 2,000 to 60,000, and more preferably 3,000 to 50,000.
In addition, the weight average molecular weight of a polymer can be measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography), and various commercially available apparatuses can be used as a measuring apparatus, and the contents of the apparatus and the measuring technique It is known to those skilled in the art.
The measurement of the weight average molecular weight by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) is carried out using HLC (registered trademark)-8220 GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corp.) as a measuring device, and TSKgel (registered trademark) Super HZM-M (4) as a column. .6 mm ID x 15 cm, Tosoh Corp. product, Super HZ 4000 (4.6 mm ID x 15 cm, Tosoh Corp. product), Super HZ 3000 (4.6 mm ID x 15 cm, Tosoh Corp. product), Super HZ 2000 (4.6 mm ID) It is possible to use THF (tetrahydrofuran) as an eluent using one obtained by connecting in series each one x 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corp., in series.
In addition, as measurement conditions, the sample concentration is 0.2% by mass, the flow rate is 0.35 ml / min, the sample injection amount is 10 μl, and the measurement temperature is 40 ° C., using a differential refractive index (RI) detector be able to.
The standard curve is the "standard sample TSK standard, polystyrene" manufactured by Tosoh Corp .: "F-40", "F-20", "F-4", "F-1", "A-5000", " It can be prepared using any of the seven samples of A-2500 "and" A-1000 ".
 特定重合体の数平均分子量と重量平均分子量との比(分散度)は、1.0~5.0が好ましく、1.05~3.5がより好ましい。 The ratio (dispersion degree) of the number average molecular weight to the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 1.0 to 5.0, and more preferably 1.05 to 3.5.
<<特定重合体の製造方法>>
 特定重合体の製造方法(合成法)は特に限定されないが、一例を挙げると、式Aで表される構成単位A1を形成するための重合性単量体、酸基を有する構成単位Bを形成するための重合性単量体、更に必要に応じて、その他の構成単位Cを形成するための重合性単量体を含む有機溶剤中、重合開始剤を用いて重合することにより合成することができる。また、いわゆる高分子反応で合成することもできる。
<< Method of producing specific polymer >>
The method for producing the specific polymer (synthetic method) is not particularly limited, but one example is formation of a polymerizable monomer for forming the structural unit A1 represented by the formula A, and a structural unit B having an acid group May be synthesized by polymerization using a polymerization initiator in an organic solvent containing a polymerizable monomer for forming the polymer and, if necessary, a polymerizable monomer for forming the other constituent unit C. it can. Moreover, it can also be synthesized by so-called polymer reaction.
 本開示における上記感光層は、上記基板に対して良好な密着性を発現させる観点から、感光層の全固形分に対し、上記重合体成分を50質量%~99.9質量%の割合で含むことが好ましく、70質量%~98質量%の割合で含むことがより好ましい。
 また、上記感光層は、上記基板に対して良好な密着性を発現させる観点から、感光層の全固形分に対し、上記特定重合体を50質量%~99.9質量%の割合で含むことが好ましく、70質量%~98質量%の割合で含むことがより好ましい。
The photosensitive layer in the present disclosure contains the polymer component at a ratio of 50% by mass to 99.9% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive layer, from the viewpoint of expressing good adhesion to the substrate. Is preferable, and it is more preferable to include 70% by mass to 98% by mass.
In addition, the photosensitive layer contains the specific polymer in a ratio of 50% by mass to 99.9% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive layer, from the viewpoint of exhibiting good adhesion to the substrate. Is preferable, and it is more preferable to include 70% by mass to 98% by mass.
<<他の重合体>>
 上記感光層は、重合体成分として、特定重合体に加え、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の効果を損なわない範囲において、式Aで示される構成単位(a)を含まない重合体(「他の重合体」と称する場合がある。)を更に含んでいてもよい。上記感光層が他の重合体を含む場合、他の重合体の配合量は、全重合体成分中、50質量%以下であることが好ましく、30質量%以下であることがより好ましく、20質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。
<< Other polymer >>
The photosensitive layer contains, as a polymer component, a polymer which does not contain the structural unit (a) represented by the formula A in addition to the specific polymer as long as the effect of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is not impaired And the like) may be further included. When the photosensitive layer contains another polymer, the blending amount of the other polymer is preferably 50% by mass or less, more preferably 30% by mass or less, based on all the polymer components, and 20% by mass. It is further more preferable that the content is% or less.
 上記感光層は、特定重合体に加え、他の重合体を1種類のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。
 他の重合体として、例えばポリヒドロキシスチレンを用いることができ、市販されている、SMA 1000P、SMA 2000P、SMA 3000P、SMA 1440F、SMA 17352P、SMA 2625P、及び、SMA 3840F(以上、サートマー社製)、ARUFON UC-3000、ARUFON UC-3510、ARUFON UC-3900、ARUFON UC-3910、ARUFON UC-3920、及び、ARUFON UC-3080(以上、東亞合成(株)製)、並びに、Joncryl 690、Joncryl 678、Joncryl 67、及び、Joncryl 586(以上、BASF社製)等を用いることもできる。
The photosensitive layer may contain only one type of other polymer in addition to the specific polymer, or may contain two or more types.
As other polymers, for example, polyhydroxystyrene can be used, and commercially available SMA 1000P, SMA 2000P, SMA 3000P, SMA 1440F, SMA 17352P, SMA 2625P, and SMA 3840F (all, manufactured by Sartmar) , ARUFON UC-3000, ARUFON UC-3510, ARUFON UC-3900, ARUFON UC-3910, ARUFON UC-3920, and ARUFON UC-3080 (all manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), and Joncryl 690, Joncryl 678 , Joncryl 67, and Joncryl 586 (above, manufactured by BASF Corp.) can also be used.
-光酸発生剤-
 上記感光層は、光酸発生剤を含有する。
 本開示で使用される光酸発生剤としては、紫外線、遠紫外線、X線、及び、荷電粒子線等の放射線を照射することにより酸を発生することができる化合物である。
 本開示で使用される光酸発生剤としては、波長300nm以上、好ましくは波長300nm~450nmの活性光線に感応し、酸を発生する化合物が好ましいが、その化学構造は制限されない。また、波長300nm以上の活性光線に直接感応しない光酸発生剤についても、増感剤と併用することによって波長300nm以上の活性光線に感応し、酸を発生する化合物であれば、増感剤と組み合わせて好ましく用いることができる。
 本開示で使用される光酸発生剤としては、pKaが4以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤が好ましく、pKaが3以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤がより好ましく、pKaが2以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤が特に好ましい。pKaの下限値は特に定めないが、例えば、-10.0以上であることが好ましい。
-Photo acid generator-
The photosensitive layer contains a photoacid generator.
The photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is a compound capable of generating an acid upon irradiation with radiation such as ultraviolet light, far ultraviolet light, X-ray, and charged particle beam.
The photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably a compound that responds to actinic light having a wavelength of 300 nm or more, preferably 300 nm to 450 nm, and generates an acid, but its chemical structure is not limited. In addition, a photoacid generator which does not directly react to actinic light having a wavelength of 300 nm or more can also be used as a sensitizer if it is a compound that responds to actinic light having a wavelength of 300 nm or more by using it in combination with a sensitizer. It can be preferably used in combination.
The photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably a photoacid generator that generates an acid with a pKa of 4 or less, more preferably a photoacid generator that generates an acid with a pKa of 3 or less, and a pKa of 2 or less Particularly preferred are photoacid generators which generate an acid of The lower limit value of pKa is not particularly limited, but is preferably, for example, -10.0 or more.
 光酸発生剤としては、イオン性光酸発生剤と、非イオン性光酸発生剤とを挙げることができる。
 また、光酸発生剤としては、感度及び解像度の観点から、後述するオニウム塩化合物、及び、後述するオキシムスルホネート化合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含むことが好ましく、オキシムスルホネート化合物を含むことがより好ましい。
As a photo-acid generator, an ionic photo-acid generator and a nonionic photo-acid generator can be mentioned.
Further, the photoacid generator preferably contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of an onium salt compound described later and an oxime sulfonate compound described later from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, and an oxime sulfonate compound More preferably,
 非イオン性光酸発生剤の例として、トリクロロメチル-s-トリアジン類、ジアゾメタン化合物、イミドスルホネート化合物、及び、オキシムスルホネート化合物などを挙げることができる。これらの中でも、感度、解像度、及び、密着性の観点から、光酸発生剤がオキシムスルホネート化合物であることが好ましい。これら光酸発生剤は、1種単独又は2種類以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。トリクロロメチル-s-トリアジン類、及び、ジアゾメタン誘導体の具体例としては、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0083~段落0088に記載の化合物が例示できる。 Examples of nonionic photoacid generators include trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, imidosulfonate compounds, and oxime sulfonate compounds. Among these, the photoacid generator is preferably an oxime sulfonate compound in terms of sensitivity, resolution, and adhesion. These photoacid generators can be used singly or in combination of two or more. As specific examples of trichloromethyl-s-triazines and diazomethane derivatives, compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0088 of JP-A-2011-221494 can be exemplified.
 オキシムスルホネート化合物、すなわち、オキシムスルホネート構造を有する化合物としては、下記式(B1)で表されるオキシムスルホネート構造を有する化合物が好ましい。 The oxime sulfonate compound, that is, a compound having an oxime sulfonate structure, is preferably a compound having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the following formula (B1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
 式(B1)中、R21は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、*は他の原子又は他の基との結合部位を表す。 In formula (B1), R 21 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and * represents a bonding site to another atom or another group.
 式(B1)で表されるオキシムスルホネート構造を有する化合物は、いずれの基も置換されてもよく、R21におけるアルキル基は、直鎖状であっても、分岐構造を有していても、環構造を有していてもよい。許容される置換基は以下に説明する。
 R21のアルキル基としては、炭素数1~10の、直鎖状又は分岐状アルキル基が好ましい。R21のアルキル基は、炭素数6~11のアリール基、炭素数1~10のアルコキシ基、シクロアルキル基(7,7-ジメチル-2-オキソノルボルニル基などの有橋式脂環基を含む、好ましくはビシクロアルキル基等)、又は、ハロゲン原子で置換されてもよい。
 R21のアリール基としては、炭素数6~18のアリール基が好ましく、フェニル基又はナフチル基がより好ましい。R21のアリール基は、炭素数1~4のアルキル基、アルコキシ基及びハロゲン原子よりなる群から選ばれた1つ以上の基で置換されてもよい。
In the compound having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the formula (B1), any group may be substituted, and the alkyl group in R 21 may be linear or branched, It may have a ring structure. The permissible substituents are described below.
As the alkyl group for R 21, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable. The alkyl group of R 21 is a bridged alicyclic group such as an aryl group having 6 to 11 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and a cycloalkyl group (7, 7-dimethyl-2-oxo norbornyl group, etc. And preferably a bicycloalkyl group or the like, or a halogen atom.
The aryl group of R 21 is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group. The aryl group of R 21 may be substituted with one or more groups selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group and a halogen atom.
 式(B1)で表されるオキシムスルホネート構造を有する化合物は、特開2014-85643号公報の段落0078~0111に記載のオキシムスルホネート化合物であることも好ましい。 The compound having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the formula (B1) is also preferably the oxime sulfonate compound described in paragraphs 0078 to 0111 of JP-A-2014-85643.
 イオン性光酸発生剤の例として、ジアリールヨードニウム塩類及びトリアリールスルホニウム塩類等のオニウム塩化合物、第四級アンモニウム塩類等を挙げることができる。これらのうち、オニウム塩化合物が好ましく、トリアリールスルホニウム塩類及びジアリールヨードニウム塩類が特に好ましい。 Examples of the ionic photoacid generator include onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salts and triarylsulfonium salts, and quaternary ammonium salts. Among these, onium salt compounds are preferable, and triarylsulfonium salts and diaryliodonium salts are particularly preferable.
 イオン性光酸発生剤としては特開2014-85643号公報の段落0114~0133に記載のイオン性光酸発生剤も好ましく用いることができる。 As the ionic photoacid generator, the ionic photoacid generators described in paragraphs 0114 to 0133 of JP-A-2014-85643 can also be preferably used.
 光酸発生剤は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 上記感光層における光酸発生剤の含有量は、感度、解像度の観点から、上記感光層の全質量に対して、0.1質量%~10質量%であることが好ましく、0.5質量%~5質量%であることがより好ましい。
A photo-acid generator may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
The content of the photoacid generator in the photosensitive layer is preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer, from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution. It is more preferable that the content be 5% by mass.
-重合性化合物-
 上記感光層は、重合性化合物を含有することが好ましい。
 重合性化合物としては、エチレン性不飽和化合物が好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和化合物は、上記感光層の感光性(すなわち、光硬化性)及び硬化膜の強度に寄与する成分である。
 また、エチレン性不飽和化合物は、1つ以上のエチレン性不飽和基を有する化合物である。
-Polymerizable compound-
The photosensitive layer preferably contains a polymerizable compound.
As a polymerizable compound, an ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferable.
The ethylenically unsaturated compound is a component that contributes to the photosensitivity (i.e., photocurability) of the photosensitive layer and the strength of the cured film.
In addition, the ethylenically unsaturated compound is a compound having one or more ethylenically unsaturated groups.
 上記感光層は、エチレン性不飽和化合物として、2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが好ましい。
 ここで、2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物とは、一分子中にエチレン性不飽和基を2つ以上有する化合物を意味する。
 エチレン性不飽和基としては、(メタ)アクリロイル基がより好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、(メタ)アクリレート化合物が好ましい。
The photosensitive layer preferably contains, as the ethylenically unsaturated compound, a difunctional or more ethylenically unsaturated compound.
Here, the bifunctional or more ethylenic unsaturated compound means a compound having two or more ethylenic unsaturated groups in one molecule.
As the ethylenically unsaturated group, a (meth) acryloyl group is more preferable.
As the ethylenically unsaturated compound, a (meth) acrylate compound is preferable.
 上記感光層は、硬化膜の塩水付与後の湿熱耐性をより向上する観点から、2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物(好ましくは、2官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物)と、3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物(好ましくは、3官能以上の(メタ)アクリレート化合物)と、を含有することが特に好ましい。 The photosensitive layer is preferably a bifunctional ethylenic unsaturated compound (preferably a bifunctional (meth) acrylate compound) and a trifunctional or more ethylenic one from the viewpoint of further improving the wet heat resistance of the cured film after salting. It is particularly preferable to contain an unsaturated compound (preferably, a trifunctional or higher functional (meth) acrylate compound).
 2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、特に制限はなく、公知の化合物の中から適宜選択できる。
 2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,9-ノナンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。
 2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、より具体的には、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジアクリレート(A-DCP、新中村化学工業(株)製)、トリシクロデカンジメナノールジメタクリレート(DCP、新中村化学工業(株)製)、1,9-ノナンジオールジアクリレート(A-NOD-N、新中村化学工業(株)製)、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジアクリレート(A-HD-N、新中村化学工業(株)製)等が挙げられる。
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a bifunctional ethylenic unsaturated compound, It can select suitably from well-known compounds.
Examples of difunctional ethylenic unsaturated compounds include tricyclodecane dimethanol di (meth) acrylate, tricyclodecane dimethanol di (meth) acrylate, 1,9-nonanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,6-hexane Diol di (meth) acrylate etc. are mentioned.
More specifically, tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate (A-DCP, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), tricyclodecane dimenanol dimethacrylate (DCP, as a difunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound) Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd. product, 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate (A-NOD-N, Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd. product), 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate (A-HD-N, Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. product etc. are mentioned.
 3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、特に制限はなく、公知の化合物の中から適宜選択できる。
 3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、例えば、ジペンタエリスリトール(トリ/テトラ/ペンタ/ヘキサ)(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトール(トリ/テトラ)(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ジトリメチロールプロパンテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、イソシアヌル酸(メタ)アクリレート、グリセリントリ(メタ)アクリレート骨格の(メタ)アクリレート化合物、等が挙げられる。
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as an ethylenically unsaturated compound more than trifunctional, It can select suitably from well-known compounds.
Examples of the trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound include dipentaerythritol (tri / tetra / penta / hexa) (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol (tri / tetra) (meth) acrylate, and trimethylolpropane tri (meth) Acrylate, ditrimethylolpropane tetra (meth) acrylate, isocyanuric acid (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylate compound of glycerin tri (meth) acrylate skeleton, and the like can be mentioned.
 ここで、「(トリ/テトラ/ペンタ/ヘキサ)(メタ)アクリレート」は、トリ(メタ)アクリレート、テトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、及びヘキサ(メタ)アクリレートを包含する概念であり、「(トリ/テトラ)(メタ)アクリレート」は、トリ(メタ)アクリレート及びテトラ(メタ)アクリレートを包含する概念である。 Here, “(tri / tetra / penta / hexa) (meth) acrylate” is a concept including tri (meth) acrylate, tetra (meth) acrylate, penta (meth) acrylate, and hexa (meth) acrylate , “(Tri / tetra) (meth) acrylate” is a concept including tri (meth) acrylate and tetra (meth) acrylate.
 エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、(メタ)アクリレート化合物のカプロラクトン変性化合物(日本化薬(株)製KAYARAD(登録商標)DPCA-20、新中村化学工業(株)製A-9300-1CL等)、(メタ)アクリレート化合物のアルキレンオキサイド変性化合物(日本化薬(株)製KAYARAD RP-1040、新中村化学工業(株)製ATM-35E、A-9300、ダイセル・オルネクス社製 EBECRYL(登録商標) 135等)、エトキシル化グリセリントリアクリレート(新中村化学工業(株)製A-GLY-9E等)等も挙げられる。 Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound include caprolactone-modified compounds of (meth) acrylate compounds (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. KAYARAD (registered trademark) DPCA-20, Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd. A-9300-1CL, etc.), Alkylene oxide-modified compounds of (meth) acrylate compounds (Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. KAYARAD RP-1040, Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co. Ltd. ATM-35E, A-9300, Daicel Ornex Co., Ltd. EBECRYL (registered trademark) 135 Etc.), ethoxylated glycerin triacrylate (eg, A-GLY-9E manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.) and the like.
 エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、ウレタン(メタ)アクリレート化合物(好ましくは3官能以上のウレタン(メタ)アクリレート化合物)も挙げられる。
 3官能以上のウレタン(メタ)アクリレート化合物としては、例えば、8UX-015A(大成ファインケミカル(株)製)、UA-32P(新中村化学工業(株)製)、UA-1100H(新中村化学工業(株)製)等が挙げられる。
As an ethylenically unsaturated compound, a urethane (meth) acrylate compound (preferably a urethane (meth) acrylate compound having three or more functional groups) is also mentioned.
Examples of urethane (meth) acrylate compounds having three or more functional groups include 8UX-015A (manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.), UA-32P (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), UA-1100H (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co. And the like.
 また、エチレン性不飽和化合物は、現像性向上及び硬化膜の塩水付与後の湿熱耐性向上の観点から、酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが好ましい。
 酸基としては、例えば、リン酸基、スルホン酸基、及び、カルボキシ基が挙げられ、カルボキシ基が好ましい。
 酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、例えば、酸基を有する3~4官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物(ペンタエリスリトールトリ及びテトラアクリレート(PETA)骨格にカルボキシ基を導入したもの(酸価=80mgKOH/g~120mgKOH/g))、酸基を有する5~6官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物(ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ及びヘキサアクリレート(DPHA)骨格にカルボキシ基を導入したもの(酸価=25mgKOH/g~70mgKOH/g))、等が挙げられる。
 これら酸基を有する3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物は、必要に応じ、酸基を有する2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物と併用してもよい。
Moreover, it is preferable that an ethylenically unsaturated compound contains an ethylenically unsaturated compound which has an acidic radical from a viewpoint of the developability improvement and the wet heat tolerance improvement after salt water provision of a cured film.
As an acid group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a carboxy group are mentioned, for example, A carboxy group is preferable.
As the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, for example, a 3- to 4-functional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group (a compound in which a carboxy group is introduced into a pentaerythritol tri and tetraacrylate (PETA) skeleton (acid value = 80 mg KOH / g to 120 mg KOH / g), 5- to 6-functional ethylenically unsaturated compounds having acid groups (in which a carboxy group is introduced to the dipentaerythritol penta and hexaacrylate (DPHA) skeleton (acid value = 25 mg KOH / g) To 70 mg KOH / g)) and the like.
The trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group may be used in combination with the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, if necessary.
 酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、カルボキシ基を含有する2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物及びそのカルボン酸無水物よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種が好ましい。これにより硬化膜の塩水付与後の湿熱耐性が高まる。
 カルボキシ基を含有する2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物は、特に制限されず、公知の化合物の中から適宜選択できる。
 カルボキシ基を含有する2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、例えば、アロニックス(登録商標)TO-2349(東亞合成(株)製)、アロニックスM-520(東亞合成(株)製)、又は、アロニックスM-510(東亞合成(株)製)を好ましく用いることができる。
As the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, at least one selected from the group consisting of a carboxy group-containing bifunctional or more ethylenically unsaturated compound and its carboxylic acid anhydride is preferable. Thereby, the wet heat resistance after salty application of a cured film increases.
The bifunctional or more ethylenically unsaturated compound containing a carboxy group is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately selected from known compounds.
Examples of the bifunctional or higher ethylenic unsaturated compound containing a carboxy group include, for example, Allonix (registered trademark) TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), Allonix M-520 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), or And Alonix M-510 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.) can be preferably used.
 酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物は、特開2004-239942号公報の段落0025~0030に記載の酸基を有する重合性化合物であることも好ましい。この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 The ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group is also preferably a polymerizable compound having an acid group described in paragraphs 0025 to 0030 of JP-A No. 2004-239942. The contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
 本開示に用いられる重合性化合物の重量平均分子量(Mw)としては、200~3,000が好ましく、250~2,600がより好ましく、280~2,200が更に好ましく、300~2,200が特に好ましい。
 また、上記感光層に用いられる重合性化合物のうち、分子量300以下の重合性化合物の含有量の割合は、上記感光層に含有されるすべてのエチレン性不飽和化合物に対して、30質量%以下が好ましく、25質量%以下がより好ましく、20質量%以下が更に好ましい。
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymerizable compound used in the present disclosure is preferably 200 to 3,000, more preferably 250 to 2,600, still more preferably 280 to 2,200, and 300 to 2,200. Particularly preferred.
In the polymerizable compound used in the photosensitive layer, the content ratio of the polymerizable compound having a molecular weight of 300 or less is 30% by mass or less based on all the ethylenically unsaturated compounds contained in the photosensitive layer. Is preferable, 25 mass% or less is more preferable, and 20 mass% or less is still more preferable.
 重合性化合物は、1種単独で使用しても、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 上記感光層における重合性化合物の含有量は、上記感光層の全質量に対し、1質量%~70質量%が好ましく、10質量%~70質量%がより好ましく、20質量%~60質量%が更に好ましく、20質量%~50質量%が特に好ましい。
The polymerizable compounds may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the polymerizable compound in the photosensitive layer is preferably 1% by mass to 70% by mass, more preferably 10% by mass to 70% by mass, and more preferably 20% by mass to 60% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. More preferably, 20% by mass to 50% by mass is particularly preferable.
 また、上記感光層が2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物と3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物とを含有する場合、2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量は、上記感光層に含まれる全てのエチレン性不飽和化合物に対し、10質量%~90質量%が好ましく、20質量%~85質量%がより好ましく、30質量%~80質量%が更に好ましい。
 また、この場合、3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量は、上記感光層に含まれる全てのエチレン性不飽和化合物に対し、10質量%~90質量%が好ましく、15質量%~80質量%がより好ましく、20質量%~70質量%が更に好ましい。
 また、この場合、2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量は、2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物と3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物との総含有量に対し、40質量%以上100質量%未満であることが好ましく、40質量%~90質量%であることがより好ましく、50質量%~80質量%であることが更に好ましく、50質量%~70質量%であることが特に好ましい。
When the photosensitive layer contains a bifunctional ethylenic unsaturated compound and a trifunctional or more ethylenically unsaturated compound, the content of the bifunctional ethylenic unsaturated compound is the same as that contained in the photosensitive layer. 10% by mass to 90% by mass is preferable, 20% by mass to 85% by mass is more preferable, and 30% by mass to 80% by mass is more preferable with respect to the ethylenically unsaturated compound of
In this case, the content of the trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 10% by mass to 90% by mass, and more preferably 15% by mass to 80% by mass, with respect to all the ethylenically unsaturated compounds contained in the photosensitive layer. % By mass is more preferable, and 20% by mass to 70% by mass is even more preferable.
In this case, the content of the bifunctional or higher ethylenic unsaturated compound is 40% by mass or more to 100% of the total content of the bifunctional ethylenic unsaturated compound and the trifunctional or higher ethylenic unsaturated compound. It is preferably less than mass%, more preferably 40 mass% to 90 mass%, still more preferably 50 mass% to 80 mass%, and particularly preferably 50 mass% to 70 mass%. .
 また、上記感光層が2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物を含有する場合、上記感光層は、更に単官能エチレン性不飽和化合物を含有してもよい。
 更に、上記感光層が2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物を含有する場合、上記感光層に含有されるエチレン性不飽和化合物において、2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物が主成分であることが好ましい。
 具体的には、上記感光層が2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物を含有する場合において、2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量は、上記感光層に含有されるエチレン性不飽和化合物の総含有量に対し、60質量%~100質量%が好ましく、80質量%~100質量%がより好ましく、90質量%~100質量%が特に好ましい。
When the photosensitive layer contains a bifunctional or more ethylenically unsaturated compound, the photosensitive layer may further contain a monofunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound.
Furthermore, when the photosensitive layer contains a bifunctional or more ethylenically unsaturated compound, in the ethylenically unsaturated compound contained in the photosensitive layer, the bifunctional or more ethylenically unsaturated compound is the main component. preferable.
Specifically, in the case where the photosensitive layer contains a bifunctional or more ethylenically unsaturated compound, the content of the bifunctional or more ethylenically unsaturated compound is the same as the ethylenically unsaturated compound contained in the photosensitive layer. The content is preferably 60% by mass to 100% by mass, more preferably 80% by mass to 100% by mass, and particularly preferably 90% by mass to 100% by mass, with respect to the total content of
 また、上記感光層が、酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物(好ましくは、カルボキシ基を含有する2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物又はそのカルボン酸無水物)を含有する場合、酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量は、上記感光層に対し、1質量%~50質量%が好ましく、1質量%~20質量%がより好ましく、1質量%~10質量%が更に好ましい。 When the photosensitive layer contains an ethylenic unsaturated compound having an acid group (preferably, a bifunctional or higher ethylenic unsaturated compound containing a carboxy group or a carboxylic acid anhydride thereof), the photosensitive layer has an acid group. The content of the ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 1% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably 1% by mass to 20% by mass, and still more preferably 1% by mass to 10% by mass, with respect to the photosensitive layer.
-酸基を有するバインダー-
 上記感光層は、酸基を有するバインダーを含有することが好ましい。
 酸基を有するバインダーとしては、アルカリ可溶性樹脂が好ましい。
 酸基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基、ホスホン酸基等が挙げられる。
 中でも、酸基としては、カルボキシ基が好ましく挙げられる。
 上記酸基を有するバインダーの酸価は、特に制限はないが、アルカリ現像性の観点から、酸価60mgKOH/g以上のアルカリ可溶性樹脂であることが好ましく、酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂であることが特に好ましい。
 酸基を有するバインダーが、上記酸価を有することで、加熱により酸と反応可能な化合物と熱架橋し、3次元架橋密度を高めることができると推定される。また、カルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂のカルボキシ基が無水化され、疎水化することにより湿熱耐性の改善に寄与すると推定される。
-Binder having an acid group-
The photosensitive layer preferably contains a binder having an acid group.
As a binder which has an acidic radical, alkali-soluble resin is preferable.
As an acid group, a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, a phosphonic acid group etc. are mentioned.
Among them, preferred as the acid group is a carboxy group.
The acid value of the binder having an acid group is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of alkali developability, an alkali-soluble resin having an acid value of 60 mg KOH / g or more is preferable, and a carboxy group containing an acid value of 60 mg KOH / g or more Particularly preferred is an acrylic resin.
It is presumed that the binder having an acid group can thermally crosslink with a compound capable of reacting with an acid by heating to increase the three-dimensional crosslink density by having the acid value. In addition, it is presumed that the carboxy group of the carboxy group-containing acrylic resin is anilized and hydrophobized to contribute to the improvement of the wet heat resistance.
 酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂(以下、特定重合体Aと称することがある。)としては、上記酸価の条件を満たす限りにおいて特に制限はなく、公知の樹脂から適宜選択して用いることができる。
 例えば、特開2011-95716号公報の段落0025に記載のポリマーのうちの酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂であるアルカリ可溶性樹脂、特開2010-237589号公報の段落0033~0052に記載のポリマーのうちの酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂等が、本開示における特定重合体Aとして好ましく用いることができる。
 ここで、(メタ)アクリル樹脂は、(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位及び(メタ)アクリル酸エステルに由来する構成単位の少なくとも一方を含む樹脂を指す。
 (メタ)アクリル樹脂中における(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位及び(メタ)アクリル酸エステルに由来する構成単位の合計割合は、30モル%以上が好ましく、50モル%以上がより好ましい。
The carboxy group-containing acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mg KOH / g or more (hereinafter, may be referred to as specific polymer A) is not particularly limited as long as the above acid value conditions are satisfied. Can be used.
For example, among the polymers described in paragraph 0025 of JP-A-2011-95716, an alkali-soluble resin which is a carboxyl group-containing acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more, paragraphs 0033 to 0052 of JP-A-2010-237589 Among the polymers described, carboxy group-containing acrylic resins having an acid value of 60 mg KOH / g or more can be preferably used as the specific polymer A in the present disclosure.
Here, the (meth) acrylic resin refers to a resin containing at least one of a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid and a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid ester.
30 mol% or more is preferable and, as for the sum total ratio of the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid and the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid ester in (meth) acrylic resin, 50 mol% or more is more preferable.
 特定重合体Aにおける、カルボキシ基を有するモノマーの共重合比の好ましい範囲は、ポリマー100質量%に対して、5質量%~50質量%であり、より好ましくは10質量%~40質量%、更に好ましくは12質量%~30質量%の範囲内である。
 特定重合体Aは、反応性基を有していてもよく、反応性基を特定重合体Aに導入する手段としては、水酸基、カルボキシ基、一級、二級アミノ基、アセトアセチル基、スルホン酸などに、エポキシ化合物、ブロックイソシアネート、イソシアネ-ト、ビニルスルホン化合物、アルデヒド化合物、メチロール化合物、カルボン酸無水物などを反応させる方法が挙げられる。
 特定重合体Aとしては、以下に示す化合物Aが好ましい。なお、以下に示す各構造単位の含有比率は目的に応じて適宜変更することができる。
The preferred range of the copolymerization ratio of the monomer having a carboxy group in the specific polymer A is 5% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably 10% by mass to 40% by mass, with respect to 100% by mass of the polymer Preferably, it is in the range of 12% by mass to 30% by mass.
The specific polymer A may have a reactive group, and as a means for introducing the reactive group into the specific polymer A, a hydroxyl group, a carboxy group, a primary or secondary amino group, an acetoacetyl group, a sulfonic acid And the like, for example, a method of reacting an epoxy compound, a blocked isocyanate, an isocyanate, a vinyl sulfone compound, an aldehyde compound, a methylol compound, a carboxylic acid anhydride and the like.
As the specific polymer A, the compound A shown below is preferable. In addition, the content ratio of each structural unit shown below can be suitably changed according to the objective.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
 本開示に用いられる酸基を有するバインダーの酸価は、アルカリ現像性の観点から、60mgKOH/g~200mgKOH/gであることが好ましく、60mgKOH/g~150mgKOH/gであることがより好ましく、60mgKOH/g~110mgKOH/gであることが更に好ましい。
 本明細書において、酸価は、JIS K0070(1992年)に記載の方法に従って、測定された値を意味する。
The acid value of the binder having an acid group used in the present disclosure is preferably 60 mg KOH / g to 200 mg KOH / g, more preferably 60 mg KOH / g to 150 mg KOH / g, and more preferably 60 mg KOH, from the viewpoint of alkali developability. It is further preferable that the amount is in the range of / g to 110 mg KOH / g.
In the present specification, the acid value means a value measured according to the method described in JIS K 0070 (1992).
 酸基を有するバインダーの重量平均分子量は、1,000以上が好ましく、1万以上がより好ましく、2万~10万が更に好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight of the binder having an acid group is preferably 1,000 or more, more preferably 10,000 or more, and still more preferably 20,000 to 100,000.
 また、上記酸基を有するバインダーは、上記特定重合体A以外にも、任意の膜形成樹脂を目的に応じて適宜選択して用いることができる。例えば、ポリヒドロキシスチレン樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリベンゾオキサゾール樹脂、ポリシロキサン樹脂などを好ましく挙げることができる。 Moreover, the binder which has the said acid group can be suitably selected and used for any film formation resin other than the said specific polymer A according to the objective. For example, polyhydroxystyrene resin, polyimide resin, polybenzoxazole resin, polysiloxane resin, etc. can be mentioned preferably.
 酸基を有するバインダーは、1種単独で使用しても、2種以上を含有してもよい。
 上記感光層における酸基を有するバインダーの含有量は、感光性の観点から、上記感光層の全質量に対し、10質量%~90質量%であることが好ましく、20質量%以上80質量%以下であることがより好ましく、30質量%以上70質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。
The binder having an acid group may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
From the viewpoint of photosensitivity, the content of the binder having an acid group in the photosensitive layer is preferably 10% by mass to 90% by mass, and more preferably 20% by mass to 80% by mass, with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. Is more preferably 30% by mass to 70% by mass.
-光重合開始剤-
 上記感光層は、光重合開始剤を含むことが好ましい。光重合開始剤は、紫外線や可視光線等の活性光線を受けて、エチレン性不飽和化合物の重合を開始する。
 光重合開始剤としては特に制限はなく、公知の光重合開始剤を用いることができる。
 光重合開始剤としては、オキシムエステル構造を有する光重合開始剤(以下、「オキシム系光重合開始剤」ともいう。)、α-アミノアルキルフェノン構造を有する光重合開始剤(以下、「α-アミノアルキルフェノン系光重合開始剤」ともいう。)、α-ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン構造を有する光重合開始剤(以下、「α-ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン系重合開始剤」ともいう。)、アシルフォスフィンオキサイド構造を有する光重合開始剤(以下、「アシルフォスフィンオキサイド系光重合開始剤」ともいう。)、N-フェニルグリシン構造を有する光重合開始剤(以下、「N-フェニルグリシン系光重合開始剤」ともいう。)等が挙げられる。
-Photopolymerization initiator-
The photosensitive layer preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator. The photopolymerization initiator receives the actinic light such as ultraviolet light and visible light to initiate polymerization of the ethylenically unsaturated compound.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a photoinitiator, A well-known photoinitiator can be used.
As the photopolymerization initiator, a photopolymerization initiator having an oxime ester structure (hereinafter, also referred to as “oxime-based photopolymerization initiator”), a photopolymerization initiator having an α-aminoalkylphenone structure (hereinafter, “α-aminoalkylphenone”) Also referred to as aminoalkylphenone photopolymerization initiators), photopolymerization initiators having an α-hydroxyalkylphenone structure (hereinafter also referred to as “α-hydroxyalkylphenone polymerization initiators”), and acyl phosphine oxide structures Photopolymerization initiator (hereinafter, also referred to as "acyl phosphine oxide photopolymerization initiator"), photopolymerization initiator having an N-phenylglycine structure (hereinafter, "N-phenylglycine photopolymerization initiator") Also referred to as
 光重合開始剤は、オキシム系光重合開始剤、α-アミノアルキルフェノン系光重合開始剤、α-ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン系重合開始剤及びN-フェニルグリシン系光重合開始剤よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましく、オキシム系光重合開始剤、α-アミノアルキルフェノン系光重合開始剤及びN-フェニルグリシン系光重合開始剤よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含むことがより好ましい。 The photopolymerization initiator is at least selected from the group consisting of an oxime photopolymerization initiator, an α-aminoalkylphenone photopolymerization initiator, an α-hydroxyalkylphenone polymerization initiator, and an N-phenylglycine photopolymerization initiator. It is preferable to include one, and it is more preferable to include at least one selected from the group consisting of an oxime photopolymerization initiator, an α-aminoalkylphenone photopolymerization initiator, and an N-phenylglycine photopolymerization initiator. .
 また、光重合開始剤としては、例えば、特開2011-95716号公報の段落0031~0042、特開2015-014783号公報の段落0064~0081に記載された重合開始剤を用いてもよい。 Further, as the photopolymerization initiator, for example, polymerization initiators described in paragraphs 0031 to 0042 of JP-A-2011-95716 and paragraphs 0064 to 0081 of JP-A-2015-014783 may be used.
 光重合開始剤の市販品としては、1-[4-(フェニルチオ)]-1,2-オクタンジオン-2-(O-ベンゾイルオキシム)(商品名:IRGACURE(登録商標) OXE-01、BASF社製)、1-[9-エチル-6-(2-メチルベンゾイル)-9H-カルバゾール-3-イル]エタノン-1-(O-アセチルオキシム)(商品名:IRGACURE OXE-02、BASF社製)、2-(ジメチルアミノ)-2-[(4-メチルフェニル)メチル]-1-[4-(4-モルホリニル)フェニル]-1-ブタノン(商品名:IRGACURE 379EG、BASF社製)、2-メチル-1-(4-メチルチオフェニル)-2-モルフォリノプロパン-1-オン(商品名:IRGACURE 907、BASF社製)、2-ヒドロキシ-1-{4-[4-(2-ヒドロキシ-2-メチル-プロピオニル)ベンジル]フェニル}-2-メチルプロパン-1-オン(商品名:IRGACURE 127、BASF社製)、2-ベンジル-2-ジメチルアミノ-1-(4-モルフォリノフェニル)-ブタノン-1(商品名:IRGACURE 369、BASF社製)、2-ヒドロキシ-2-メチル-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン(商品名:IRGACURE 1173、BASF社製)、1-ヒドロキシシクロヘキシルフェニルケトン(商品名:IRGACURE 184、BASF社製)、2,2-ジメトキシ-1,2-ジフェニルエタン-1-オン(商品名:IRGACURE 651、BASF社製)、オキシムエステル系の(商品名:Lunar 6、DKSHジャパン(株)製)などが挙げられる。 As commercially available products of the photopolymerization initiator, 1- [4- (phenylthio)]-1,2-octanedione-2- (O-benzoyloxime) (trade name: IRGACURE (registered trademark) OXE-01, BASF AG) 1- [9-ethyl-6- (2-methylbenzoyl) -9H-carbazol-3-yl] ethanone-1- (O-acetyloxime) (trade name: IRGACURE OXE-02, manufactured by BASF AG) 2- (dimethylamino) -2-[(4-methylphenyl) methyl] -1- [4- (4-morpholinyl) phenyl] -1-butanone (trade name: IRGACURE 379EG, manufactured by BASF), 2- Methyl-1- (4-methylthiophenyl) -2-morpholinopropan-1-one (trade name: IRGACURE 907, manufactured by BASF), 2- Droxy-1- {4- [4- (2-hydroxy-2-methyl-propionyl) benzyl] phenyl} -2-methylpropan-1-one (trade name: IRGACURE 127, manufactured by BASF), 2-benzyl- 2-Dimethylamino-1- (4-morpholinophenyl) -butanone-1 (trade name: IRGACURE 369, manufactured by BASF), 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-phenylpropan-1-one (trade name: IRGACURE 1173 (manufactured by BASF), 1-hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketone (trade name: IRGACURE 184, manufactured by BASF), 2,2-dimethoxy-1,2-diphenylethane-1-one (trade name: IRGACURE 651, BASF) (Product name: Lunar 6, D) SH manufactured by Japan Co., Ltd.), and the like.
 光重合開始剤は、1種単独で使用しても、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 上記感光層における光重合開始剤の含有量は、特に制限はないが、上記感光層の全質量に対し、0.1質量%以上が好ましく、0.5質量%以上がより好ましく、1.0質量%以上が更に好ましい。
 また、光重合開始剤の含有量は、感光層の全質量に対し、10質量%以下が好ましく、5質量%以下がより好ましい。
The photopolymerization initiator may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the photopolymerization initiator in the photosensitive layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, and more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. % Or more is more preferable.
Moreover, 10 mass% or less is preferable with respect to the total mass of a photosensitive layer, and, as for content of a photoinitiator, 5 mass% or less is more preferable.
-その他の添加剤-
 本開示における上記感光層は、上記成分以外にも、必要に応じて公知の添加剤を含むことができる。
-Other additives-
The photosensitive layer in the present disclosure may further contain known additives, if necessary, in addition to the components described above.
〔界面活性剤〕
 上記感光層は、膜厚均一性の観点から界面活性剤を含有することが好ましい。界面活性剤としては、アニオン系、カチオン系、ノニオン系(非イオン系)、又は、両性のいずれでも使用することができるが、好ましい界面活性剤はノニオン界面活性剤である。
 ノニオン系界面活性剤の例としては、ポリオキシエチレン高級アルキルエーテル類、ポリオキシエチレン高級アルキルフェニルエーテル類、ポリオキシエチレングリコールの高級脂肪酸ジエステル類、シリコーン系、フッ素系界面活性剤を挙げることができる。また、以下商品名で、KP(信越化学工業(株)製)、ポリフロー(共栄社化学(株)製)、エフトップ(JEMCO社製)、メガファック(DIC(株)製)、フロラード(住友スリーエム(株)製)、アサヒガード、サーフロン(旭硝子(株)製)、PolyFox(OMNOVA社製)、及び、SH-8400(東レ・ダウコーニング(株)製)等の各シリーズを挙げることができる。
 また、界面活性剤として、下記式I-1で表される構成単位A及び構成単位Bを含み、テトラヒドロフラン(THF)を溶剤とした場合のゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィーで測定されるポリスチレン換算の重量平均分子量(Mw)が1,000以上10,000以下である共重合体を好ましい例として挙げることができる。
[Surfactant]
The photosensitive layer preferably contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of film thickness uniformity. As the surfactant, any of anionic, cationic, nonionic (nonionic), or amphoteric can be used, but a preferred surfactant is a nonionic surfactant.
Examples of nonionic surfactants include polyoxyethylene higher alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene higher alkyl phenyl ethers, higher fatty acid diesters of polyoxyethylene glycol, silicone surfactants, and fluorine surfactants. . In addition, KP (made by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), Polyflow (made by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), F-top (made by JEMCO), Megafac (made by DIC), Florard (Sumitomo 3M) under the following trade names Each series may be mentioned, such as (manufactured by Co., Ltd.), Asahi Guard, Surfron (manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.), PolyFox (manufactured by OMNOVA), and SH-8400 (manufactured by Toray Dow Corning).
Moreover, the weight average as polystyrene conversion measured by the gel permeation chromatography at the time of using tetrahydrofuran (THF) as a solvent, containing the structural unit A and the structural unit B represented by following formula I-1 as surfactant is used A copolymer having a molecular weight (Mw) of 1,000 or more and 10,000 or less can be mentioned as a preferred example.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 式(I-1)中、R401及びR403はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はメチル基を表し、R402は炭素数1以上4以下の直鎖アルキレン基を表し、R404は水素原子又は炭素数1以上4以下のアルキル基を表し、Lは炭素数3以上6以下のアルキレン基を表し、p及びqは重合比を表す質量百分率であり、pは10質量%以上80質量%以下の数値を表し、qは20質量%以上90質量%以下の数値を表し、rは1以上18以下の整数を表し、sは1以上10以下の整数を表し、*は他の構造との結合部位を表す。 In formula (I-1), each of R 401 and R 403 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R 402 represents a linear alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and R 404 represents a hydrogen atom or carbon L represents an alkyl group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms, p and q each represent a polymerization percentage, and p represents a numerical value of 10% to 80% by mass. Q represents a numerical value of 20% to 90% by mass, r represents an integer of 1 to 18 and s represents an integer of 1 to 10, and * represents a binding site to another structure Represent.
 Lは、下記式(I-2)で表される分岐アルキレン基であることが好ましい。式(I-2)におけるR405は、炭素数1以上4以下のアルキル基を表し、相溶性と被塗布面に対する濡れ性の点で、炭素数1以上3以下のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数2又は3のアルキル基がより好ましい。pとqとの和(p+q)は、p+q=100、すなわち、100質量%であることが好ましい。 L is preferably a branched alkylene group represented by the following formula (I-2). R 405 in the formula (I-2) represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and in view of compatibility and wettability to the coated surface, an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms is preferable, and the carbon number is Two or three alkyl groups are more preferred. The sum of p and q (p + q) is preferably p + q = 100, that is, 100% by mass.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 共重合体の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、1,500以上5,000以下がより好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the copolymer is more preferably 1,500 or more and 5,000 or less.
 その他、特許第4502784号公報の段落0017、特開2009-237362号公報の段落0060~段落0071に記載の界面活性剤も用いることができる。 In addition, surfactants described in paragraph 0017 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784 and paragraph 0060 to paragraph 0071 of JP2009-237362A can also be used.
 界面活性剤は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 界面活性剤の添加量は、上記感光層の全質量に対して、10質量%以下であることが好ましく、0.001質量%~10質量%であることがより好ましく、0.01質量%~3質量%であることが更に好ましい。
The surfactant may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The addition amount of the surfactant is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 0.001% by mass to 10% by mass, and more preferably 0.01% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. More preferably, it is 3% by mass.
〔重合禁止剤〕
 上記感光層は、重合禁止剤を少なくとも1種含有してもよい。
 重合禁止剤としては、例えば、特許第4502784号公報の段落0018に記載された熱重合防止剤を用いることができる。
 中でも、フェノチアジン、フェノキサジン又は4-メトキシフェノールを好適に用いることができる。
[Polymerization inhibitor]
The photosensitive layer may contain at least one polymerization inhibitor.
As the polymerization inhibitor, for example, a thermal polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph 0018 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784 can be used.
Among them, phenothiazine, phenoxazine or 4-methoxyphenol can be suitably used.
 上記感光層が重合禁止剤を含有する場合、重合禁止剤の含有量は、上記感光層の全質量に対して、0.01質量%~3質量%が好ましく、0.01質量%~1質量%がより好ましく、0.01質量%~0.8質量%が更に好ましい。 When the photosensitive layer contains a polymerization inhibitor, the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01% by mass to 3% by mass, and preferably 0.01% by mass to 1% by mass, with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. % Is more preferable, and 0.01% by mass to 0.8% by mass is more preferable.
〔溶剤〕
 上記感光層は、溶剤を含んでいてもよい。
 また、上記感光層を形成する感光性樹脂組成物は、上記感光層を容易に形成するため、一旦溶剤を含有させて感光性樹脂組成物の粘度を調節し、溶剤を含む感光性樹脂組成物を塗布及び乾燥して、上記感光層を好適に形成することができる。
 本開示に使用される溶剤としては、公知の溶剤を用いることができる。溶剤としては、エチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル類、エチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、エチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル類、プロピレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、ジエチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、ジエチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、ジプロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル類、ジプロピレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、ジプロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、エステル類、ケトン類、アミド類、及び、ラクトン類等が例示できる。また、溶剤の具体例としては特開2011-221494号公報の段落0174~段落0178に記載の溶剤も挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
〔solvent〕
The photosensitive layer may contain a solvent.
Moreover, in order to form the said photosensitive layer easily, the photosensitive resin composition which forms the said photosensitive layer makes a solvent contain once, adjusts the viscosity of the photosensitive resin composition, and the photosensitive resin composition containing a solvent is included. Can be applied and dried to suitably form the photosensitive layer.
A well-known solvent can be used as a solvent used for this indication. As a solvent, ethylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, ethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, ethylene glycol mono alkyl ether acetates, propylene glycol mono alkyl ethers, propylene glycol dialkyl ethers, propylene glycol mono alkyl ether acetates, diethylene glycol dialkyl ethers And diethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol dialkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, esters, ketones, amides, and lactones. Further, specific examples of the solvent also include the solvents described in paragraphs [0174] to [0178] of JP-A-2011-221494, the contents of which are incorporated in the present specification.
 また、既述の溶剤に、更に必要に応じて、ベンジルエチルエーテル、ジヘキシルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノフェニルエーテルアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、イソホロン、カプロン酸、カプリル酸、1-オクタノール、1-ノナール、ベンジルアルコール、アニソール、酢酸ベンジル、安息香酸エチル、シュウ酸ジエチル、マレイン酸ジエチル、炭酸エチレン、又は、炭酸プロピレン等の溶剤を添加することもできる。
 溶剤は、1種のみ用いてもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
 本開示に用いることができる溶剤は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種を併用することがより好ましい。溶剤を2種以上使用する場合には、例えば、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類とジアルキルエーテル類との併用、ジアセテート類とジエチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類との併用、又は、エステル類とブチレングリコールアルキルエーテルアセテート類との併用が好ましい。
In addition to the solvents described above, benzyl ethyl ether, dihexyl ether, ethylene glycol monophenyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, isophorone, caproic acid, caprylic acid, 1-octanol, 1 if necessary. Solvents such as nonal, benzyl alcohol, anisole, benzyl acetate, ethyl benzoate, diethyl oxalate, diethyl maleate, ethylene carbonate or propylene carbonate can also be added.
The solvent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The solvents that can be used in the present disclosure may be used alone or in combination of two. When two or more solvents are used, for example, combined use of propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates and dialkyl ethers, combined use of diacetates and diethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, or esters and butylene glycol alkyl ether acetate Preferably used in combination with a class.
 また、溶剤としては、沸点130℃以上160℃未満の溶剤、沸点160℃以上の溶剤、又は、これらの混合物であることが好ましい。
 沸点130℃以上160℃未満の溶剤としては、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(沸点146℃)、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート(沸点158℃)、プロピレングリコールメチル-n-ブチルエーテル(沸点155℃)、及び、プロピレングリコールメチル-n-プロピルエーテル(沸点131℃)が例示できる。
 沸点160℃以上の溶剤としては、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル(沸点170℃)、ジエチレングリコールメチルエチルエーテル(沸点176℃)、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルプロピオネート(沸点160℃)、ジプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテート(沸点213℃)、3-メトキシブチルエーテルアセテート(沸点171℃)、ジエチレングリコールジエチエルエーテル(沸点189℃)、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル(沸点162℃)、プロピレングリコールジアセテート(沸点190℃)、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート(沸点220℃)、ジプロピレングリコールジメチルエーテル(沸点175℃)、及び、1,3-ブチレングリコールジアセテート(沸点232℃)が例示できる。
The solvent is preferably a solvent having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or more and less than 160 ° C., a solvent having a boiling point of 160 ° C. or more, or a mixture thereof.
As solvents having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or more and less than 160 ° C., propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (boiling point 146 ° C.), propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (boiling point 158 ° C.), propylene glycol methyl-n-butyl ether (boiling point 155 ° C.), Propylene glycol methyl-n-propyl ether (bp 131 ° C.) can be exemplified.
As solvents having a boiling point of 160 ° C. or higher, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate (boiling point 170 ° C.), diethylene glycol methyl ethyl ether (boiling point 176 ° C.), propylene glycol monomethyl ether propionate (boiling point 160 ° C.), dipropylene glycol methyl ether acetate (Boiling point 213 ° C), 3-methoxybutyl ether acetate (boiling point 171 ° C), diethylene glycol diethyl ether (boiling point 189 ° C), diethylene glycol dimethyl ether (boiling point 162 ° C), propylene glycol diacetate (boiling point 190 ° C), diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (Boiling point 220 ° C.), dipropylene glycol dimethyl ether (boiling point 175 ° C.), and 1,3-butylene glycol diacetate (boiling point 232 ° C.) There can be exemplified.
 感光性樹脂組成物を塗布する際における溶剤の含有量は、感光性樹脂組成物中の全固形分100質量部あたり、50質量部~1,900質量部であることが好ましく、100質量部~900質量部であることがより好ましい。
 また、上記感光層における溶剤の含有量は、上記感光層の全質量に対し、2質量%以下であることが好ましく、1質量%以下であることがより好ましく、0.5質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。
When the photosensitive resin composition is applied, the content of the solvent is preferably 50 parts by mass to 1,900 parts by mass, and 100 parts by mass to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content in the photosensitive resin composition. More preferably, it is 900 parts by mass.
The content of the solvent in the photosensitive layer is preferably 2% by mass or less, more preferably 1% by mass or less, and more preferably 0.5% by mass or less based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. Is more preferred.
〔可塑剤〕
 上記感光層は、可塑性を改良する目的で、可塑剤を含有してもよい。
 上記可塑剤は、特定重合体よりも重量平均分子量が小さいことが好ましい。
 可塑剤の重量平均分子量は、可塑性付与の観点から500以上10,000未満が好ましく、700以上5,000未満がより好ましく、800以上4,000未満が更に好ましい。
 可塑剤は、特定重合体と相溶して可塑性を発現する化合物であれば特に限定されないが、可塑性付与の観点から、可塑剤は、分子中にアルキレンオキシ基を有することが好ましい。可塑剤に含まれるアルキレンオキシ基は下記構造を有することが好ましい。
[Plasticizer]
The photosensitive layer may contain a plasticizer for the purpose of improving the plasticity.
It is preferable that the said plasticizer has a smaller weight average molecular weight than a specific polymer.
The weight average molecular weight of the plasticizer is preferably 500 or more and less than 10,000, more preferably 700 or more and less than 5,000, and still more preferably 800 or more and less than 4,000 from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity.
The plasticizer is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound that is compatible with the specific polymer to exhibit plasticity, but from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity, the plasticizer preferably has an alkyleneoxy group in the molecule. The alkyleneoxy group contained in the plasticizer preferably has the following structure.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
 上記式中、Rは炭素数2~8のアルキル基であり、nは1~50の整数を表し、*は他の原子との結合部位を表す。 In the above formulae, R is an alkyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, n is an integer of 1 to 50, and * represents a bonding site to another atom.
 なお、例えば、上記構造のアルキレンオキシ基を有する化合物(「化合物X」とする。)であっても、化合物X、特定重合体及び光酸発生剤を混合して得た化学増幅ポジ型感光性樹脂組成物が、化合物Xを含まずに形成した化学増幅ポジ型感光性樹脂組成物に比べて可塑性が向上しない場合は、本開示における可塑剤には該当しない。例えば、任意に添加される界面活性剤は、一般に感光性樹脂組成物に可塑性をもたらす量で使用されることはないため、本明細書における可塑剤には該当しない。 In addition, for example, even if it is a compound having an alkyleneoxy group of the above structure (referred to as “compound X”), chemically amplified positive type photosensitivity obtained by mixing the compound X, a specific polymer and a photoacid generator When the resin composition does not improve the plasticity as compared with the chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin composition formed without containing the compound X, it does not correspond to the plasticizer in the present disclosure. For example, surfactants that are optionally added do not fall under the plasticizers herein because they are not generally used in amounts that provide plasticity to the photosensitive resin composition.
 上記可塑剤としては、例えば、下記構造を有する化合物が挙げられるが、これらに限定されるものではない。 As said plasticizer, although the compound which has the following structure is mentioned, for example, it is not limited to these.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 可塑剤の含有量は、密着性の観点から、上記感光層の全質量に対して、1質量%~50質量%であることが好ましく、2質量%~20質量%であることがより好ましい。
 上記感光層は、可塑剤を1種のみを含んでいてもよく、2種以上を含んでいてもよい。
The content of the plasticizer is preferably 1% by mass to 50% by mass, and more preferably 2% by mass to 20% by mass, with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer, from the viewpoint of adhesion.
The photosensitive layer may contain only one type of plasticizer, or may contain two or more types.
〔増感剤〕
 上記感光層は、増感剤を更に含むことができる。
 増感剤は、活性光線を吸収して電子励起状態となる。電子励起状態となった増感剤は、光酸発生剤と接触して、電子移動、エネルギー移動、及び、発熱などの作用が生じる。これにより光酸発生剤は化学変化を起こして分解し、酸を生成する。
 増感剤を含有させることで、露光感度を向上させることができる。
[Sensitizer]
The photosensitive layer can further contain a sensitizer.
The sensitizer absorbs an actinic ray to be in an electronically excited state. The sensitizer in the electronically excited state comes into contact with the photoacid generator to produce actions such as electron transfer, energy transfer and heat generation. Thus, the photoacid generator chemically changes and decomposes to generate an acid.
Exposure sensitivity can be improved by containing a sensitizer.
 増感剤としては、アントラセン誘導体、アクリドン誘導体、チオキサントン誘導体、クマリン誘導体、ベーススチリル誘導体、及び、ジスチリルベンゼン誘導体よりなる群からえらばれた化合物が好ましく、アントラセン誘導体がより好ましい。
 アントラセン誘導体としては、アントラセン、9,10-ジブトキシアントラセン、9,10-ジクロロアントラセン、2-エチル-9,10-ジメトキシアントラセン、9-ヒドロキシメチルアントラセン、9-ブロモアントラセン、9-クロロアントラセン、9,10-ジブロモアントラセン、2-エチルアントラセン、又は、9,10-ジメトキシアントラセンが好ましい。
As the sensitizer, compounds selected from the group consisting of anthracene derivatives, acridone derivatives, thioxanthone derivatives, coumarin derivatives, base styryl derivatives, and distyryl benzene derivatives are preferable, and anthracene derivatives are more preferable.
As the anthracene derivative, anthracene, 9,10-dibutoxyanthracene, 9,10-dichloroanthracene, 2-ethyl-9,10-dimethoxyanthracene, 9-hydroxymethylanthracene, 9-bromoanthracene, 9-chloroanthracene, 9 10-dibromoanthracene, 2-ethylanthracene or 9,10-dimethoxyanthracene is preferred.
 上記増感剤としては、国際公開第2015/093271号の段落0139~段落0141に記載の化合物を挙げることができる。 Examples of the sensitizer include the compounds described in paragraph 0139 to paragraph 0141 of WO 2015/093271.
 増感剤の含有量は、上記感光層の全質量に対して、0質量%~10質量%であることが好ましく、0.1質量%~10質量%であることがより好ましい。 The content of the sensitizer is preferably 0% by mass to 10% by mass, and more preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass, with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
〔塩基性化合物〕
 上記感光層は、塩基性化合物を更に含むことが好ましい。
 塩基性化合物としては、化学増幅レジストで用いられる塩基性化合物の中から任意に選択して使用することができる。例えば、脂肪族アミン、芳香族アミン、複素環式アミン、第四級アンモニウムヒドロキシド、及び、カルボン酸の第四級アンモニウム塩等が挙げられる。これらの具体例としては、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0204~段落0207に記載の化合物が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
[Basic compound]
The photosensitive layer preferably further contains a basic compound.
As the basic compound, any one of basic compounds used in a chemical amplification resist can be selected and used. For example, aliphatic amines, aromatic amines, heterocyclic amines, quaternary ammonium hydroxides, and quaternary ammonium salts of carboxylic acids can be mentioned. Specific examples thereof include the compounds described in paragraphs [0204] to [0207] of JP-A-2011-221494, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 具体的には、脂肪族アミンとしては、例えば、トリメチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、トリエチルアミン、ジ-n-プロピルアミン、トリ-n-プロピルアミン、ジ-n-ペンチルアミン、トリ-n-ペンチルアミン、ジエタノールアミン、トリエタノールアミン、ジシクロヘキシルアミン、及び、ジシクロヘキシルメチルアミンなどが挙げられる。
 芳香族アミンとしては、例えば、アニリン、ベンジルアミン、N,N-ジメチルアニリン、及び、ジフェニルアミンなどが挙げられる。
 複素環式アミンとしては、例えば、ピリジン、2-メチルピリジン、4-メチルピリジン、2-エチルピリジン、4-エチルピリジン、2-フェニルピリジン、4-フェニルピリジン、N-メチル-4-フェニルピリジン、4-ジメチルアミノピリジン、イミダゾール、ベンズイミダゾール、4-メチルイミダゾール、2-フェニルベンズイミダゾール、2,4,5-トリフェニルイミダゾール、ニコチン、ニコチン酸、ニコチン酸アミド、キノリン、8-オキシキノリン、ピラジン、ピラゾール、ピリダジン、プリン、ピロリジン、ピペリジン、ピペラジン、モルホリン、4-メチルモルホリン、1,5-ジアザビシクロ[4.3.0]-5-ノネン、及び、1,8-ジアザビシクロ[5.3.0]-7-ウンデセンなどが挙げられる。
 第四級アンモニウムヒドロキシドとしては、例えば、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラ-n-ブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、及び、テトラ-n-ヘキシルアンモニウムヒドロキシドなどが挙げられる。
 カルボン酸の第四級アンモニウム塩としては、例えば、テトラメチルアンモニウムアセテート、テトラメチルアンモニウムベンゾエート、テトラ-n-ブチルアンモニウムアセテート、及び、テトラ-n-ブチルアンモニウムベンゾエートなどが挙げられる。
Specifically, as aliphatic amines, for example, trimethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, di-n-propylamine, tri-n-propylamine, di-n-pentylamine, tri-n-pentylamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine Examples include ethanolamine, dicyclohexylamine, and dicyclohexylmethylamine.
Examples of aromatic amines include aniline, benzylamine, N, N-dimethylaniline, and diphenylamine.
Examples of the heterocyclic amine include pyridine, 2-methylpyridine, 4-methylpyridine, 2-ethylpyridine, 4-ethylpyridine, 2-phenylpyridine, 4-phenylpyridine, N-methyl-4-phenylpyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, imidazole, benzimidazole, 4-methylimidazole, 2-phenylbenzimidazole, 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole, nicotine, nicotinic acid, nicotinic acid amide, quinoline, 8-oxyquinoline, pyrazine, Pyrazole, pyridazine, purine, pyrrolidine, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, 4-methylmorpholine, 1,5-diazabicyclo [4.3.0] -5-nonene, and 1,8-diazabicyclo [5.3.0] -7-Undesen etc. are mentioned.
Examples of quaternary ammonium hydroxides include tetramethyl ammonium hydroxide, tetraethyl ammonium hydroxide, tetra-n-butyl ammonium hydroxide, and tetra-n-hexyl ammonium hydroxide.
Examples of quaternary ammonium salts of carboxylic acids include tetramethyl ammonium acetate, tetramethyl ammonium benzoate, tetra-n-butyl ammonium acetate, and tetra-n-butyl ammonium benzoate.
 上記塩基性化合物は、1種単独で使用しても、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 塩基性化合物の含有量は、上記感光層の全質量に対して、0.001質量%~5質量%であることが好ましく、0.005質量%~3質量%であることがより好ましい。
The above basic compounds may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the basic compound is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5% by mass, and more preferably 0.005% by mass to 3% by mass, with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
〔ヘテロ環状化合物〕
 本開示における感光層は、ヘテロ環状化合物を含むことができる。
 本開示におけるヘテロ環状化合物には、特に制限はない。例えば、以下に述べる分子内にエポキシ基又はオキセタニル基を有する化合物、アルコキシメチル基含有ヘテロ環状化合物、その他、各種環状エーテル、環状エステル(ラクトン)などの含酸素モノマー、環状アミン、オキサゾリンといった含窒素モノマー、更には珪素、硫黄、リンなどのd電子をもつヘテロ環モノマー等を添加することができる。
[Heterocyclic compounds]
The photosensitive layer in the present disclosure can contain a heterocyclic compound.
There is no particular limitation on the heterocyclic compound in the present disclosure. For example, a compound having an epoxy group or an oxetanyl group in the molecule described below, an alkoxymethyl group-containing heterocyclic compound, various cyclic ethers, oxygen-containing monomers such as cyclic esters (lactones), nitrogen-containing monomers such as cyclic amines and oxazolines Furthermore, heterocyclic monomers having d electrons such as silicon, sulfur and phosphorus can be added.
 感光層中におけるヘテロ環状化合物の添加量は、ヘテロ環状化合物を添加する場合には、上記感光層の全質量に対し、0.01質量%~50質量%であることが好ましく、0.1質量%~10質量%であることがより好ましく、1質量%~5質量%であることが更に好ましい。上記範囲であると、密着性及びエッチング耐性の観点で好ましい。ヘテロ環状化合物は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を併用することもできる。 The addition amount of the heterocyclic compound in the photosensitive layer is preferably 0.01% by mass to 50% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer, when the heterocyclic compound is added. % To 10% by mass is more preferable, and 1% to 5% by mass is even more preferable. It is preferable in the viewpoint of adhesiveness and etching tolerance as it is the said range. The heterocyclic compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 分子内にエポキシ基を有する化合物の具体例としては、ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂、ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂、フェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、クレゾールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、脂肪族エポキシ樹脂等を挙げることができる。 Specific examples of the compound having an epoxy group in the molecule include bisphenol A epoxy resin, bisphenol F epoxy resin, phenol novolac epoxy resin, cresol novolac epoxy resin, aliphatic epoxy resin and the like.
 分子内にエポキシ基を有する化合物は市販品として入手できる。例えば、JER828、JER1007、JER157S70(三菱化学(株)製)、JER157S65((株)三菱ケミカルホールディングス製)など、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0189に記載の市販品などが挙げられる。
 その他の市販品として、ADEKA RESIN EP-4000S、同EP-4003S、同EP-4010S、同EP-4011S(以上、(株)ADEKA製)、NC-2000、NC-3000、NC-7300、XD-1000、EPPN-501、EPPN-502(以上、(株)ADEKA製)、デナコールEX-611、EX-612、EX-614、EX-614B、EX-622、EX-512、EX-521、EX-411、EX-421、EX-313、EX-314、EX-321、EX-211、EX-212、EX-810、EX-811、EX-850、EX-851、EX-821、EX-830、EX-832、EX-841、EX-911、EX-941、EX-920、EX-931、EX-212L、EX-214L、EX-216L、EX-321L、EX-850L、DLC-201、DLC-203、DLC-204、DLC-205、DLC-206、DLC-301、DLC-402、EX-111,EX-121、EX-141、EX-145、EX-146、EX-147、EX-171、EX-192(以上ナガセケムテック製)、YH-300、YH-301、YH-302、YH-315、YH-324、YH-325(以上、新日鐵住金化学(株)製)セロキサイド2021P、2081、2000、3000、EHPE3150、エポリードGT400、セルビナースB0134、B0177((株)ダイセル製)などが挙げられる。
 分子内にエポキシ基を有する化合物は1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。
Compounds having an epoxy group in the molecule are commercially available. For example, commercially available products described in paragraph 0189 of JP-A-2011-221494, such as JER 828, JER 1007, JER 157 S70 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), JER 157 S 65 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Holdings), and the like can be mentioned.
Other commercially available products include ADEKA RESIN EP-4000S, EP-4003S, EP-4010S, EP-4011S (all manufactured by ADEKA), NC-2000, NC-3000, NC-7300, XD- 1000, EPPN-501, EPPN-502 (above, made by ADEKA Co., Ltd.), Denacol EX-611, EX-612, EX-614, EX-614B, EX-622, EX-512, EX-521, EX- 411, EX-421, EX-313, EX-314, EX-321, EX-211, EX-212, EX-810, EX-811, EX-850, EX-851, EX-821, EX-830, EX-832, EX-841, EX-911, EX-941, EX-920, EX-931, EX-212 , EX-214L, EX-216L, EX-321L, EX-850L, DLC-201, DLC-203, DLC-204, DLC-205, DLC-206, DLC-301, DLC-402, EX-111, EX -121, EX-141, EX-145, EX-146, EX-147, EX-171, EX-192 (manufactured by Nagase Chemtech Inc.), YH-300, YH-301, YH-302, YH-315, YH-324, YH-325 (all manufactured by Nippon Steel & Sumikin Chemical Co., Ltd.) Celoxide 2021 P, 2081, 2000, 3000, EHPE 3150, Epolide GT 400, Celliners B 0134, B 0177 (manufactured by Daicel Co., Ltd.) and the like.
The compound which has an epoxy group in a molecule may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
 分子内にエポキシ基を有する化合物の中でも、ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂、ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂、フェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂及び脂肪族エポキシ樹脂がより好ましく挙げられ、脂肪族エポキシ樹脂が特に好ましく挙げられる。 Among the compounds having an epoxy group in the molecule, bisphenol A epoxy resin, bisphenol F epoxy resin, phenol novolac epoxy resin and aliphatic epoxy resin are more preferable, and aliphatic epoxy resin is particularly preferable.
 分子内にオキセタニル基を有する化合物の具体例としては、アロンオキセタンOXT-201、OXT-211、OXT-212、OXT-213、OXT-121、OXT-221、OX-SQ、PNOX(以上、東亞合成(株)製)を用いることができる。 Specific examples of the compound having an oxetanyl group in the molecule include alonoxetane OXT-201, OXT-211, OXT-212, OXT-213, OXT-121, OXT-221, OX-SQ, PNOX Co., Ltd. can be used.
 また、オキセタニル基を含む化合物は、単独で又はエポキシ基を含む化合物と混合して使用することが好ましい。 Moreover, it is preferable to use the compound containing an oxetanyl group individually or in mixture with the compound containing an epoxy group.
 本開示における感光層においては、ヘテロ環状化合物がエポキシ基を有する化合物であることが、エッチング耐性及び線幅安定性の観点から好ましい。 In the photosensitive layer in the present disclosure, it is preferable from the viewpoint of etching resistance and line width stability that the heterocyclic compound is a compound having an epoxy group.
〔アルコキシシラン化合物〕
 上記感光層は、アルコキシシラン化合物を含有してもよい。アルコキシシラン化合物としては、トリアルコキシシラン化合物が好ましく挙げられる。
 アルコキシシラン化合物としては、例えば、γ-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、γ-アミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン、γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリアコキシシラン、γ-グリシドキシプロピルアルキルジアルコキシシラン、γ-メタクリロキシプロピルトリアルコキシシラン、γ-メタクリロキシプロピルアルキルジアルコキシシラン、γ-クロロプロピルトリアルコキシシラン、γ-メルカプトプロピルトリアルコキシシラン、β-(3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシル)エチルトリアルコキシシラン、ビニルトリアルコキシシランが挙げられる。これらのうち、γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリアルコキシシランやγ-メタクリロキシプロピルトリアルコキシシランがより好ましく、γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリアルコキシシランが更に好ましく、3-グリシドキシプロピルトリメトキシシランが特に好ましい。これらは1種単独又は2種以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。
[Alkoxysilane compound]
The photosensitive layer may contain an alkoxysilane compound. As an alkoxysilane compound, a trialkoxysilane compound is mentioned preferably.
As the alkoxysilane compound, for example, γ-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, γ-aminopropyltriethoxysilane, γ-glycidoxypropyltriacoxysilane, γ-glycidoxypropylalkyldialkoxysilane, γ-methacryloxy Propyltrialkoxysilane, γ-methacryloxypropylalkyldialkoxysilane, γ-chloropropyltrialkoxysilane, γ-mercaptopropyltrialkoxysilane, β- (3,4-epoxycyclohexyl) ethyltrialkoxysilane, vinyltrialkoxysilane Can be mentioned. Among these, γ-glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane and γ-methacryloxypropyltrialkoxysilane are more preferable, γ-glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane is more preferable, and 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane is particularly preferable. preferable. These can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
〔その他の成分〕
 本開示における感光層には、金属酸化物粒子、酸化防止剤、分散剤、酸増殖剤、現像促進剤、導電性繊維、着色剤、熱ラジカル重合開始剤、熱酸発生剤、紫外線吸収剤、増粘剤、架橋剤、及び、有機又は無機の沈殿防止剤などの公知の添加剤を更に加えることができる。
 その他の成分の好ましい態様については特開2014-85643号公報の段落0165~段落0184にそれぞれ記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
[Other ingredients]
In the photosensitive layer in the present disclosure, metal oxide particles, an antioxidant, a dispersant, an acid multiplying agent, a development accelerator, a conductive fiber, a colorant, a thermal radical polymerization initiator, a thermal acid generator, an ultraviolet absorber, Further known additives such as thickeners, crosslinkers and organic or inorganic suspending agents can be added.
Preferred embodiments of the other components are described in paragraphs [0165] to [0184] of JP-A-2014-85643, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
-感光層の平均膜厚-
 上記感光層の平均膜厚は、転写性(ラミネート性)の観点から、1.0μm以上が好ましく、2.0μm以上がより好ましく、5.0μm以上が更に好ましい。また、上記感光層の平均膜厚は、製造適性の観点から、20μm以下が好ましく、15μm以下がより好ましい。
-Average film thickness of photosensitive layer-
The average film thickness of the photosensitive layer is preferably 1.0 μm or more, more preferably 2.0 μm or more, and still more preferably 5.0 μm or more, from the viewpoint of transferability (lamination property). The average film thickness of the photosensitive layer is preferably 20 μm or less, more preferably 15 μm or less, from the viewpoint of production suitability.
-感光層の形成方法-
 各成分、及び、溶剤を任意の割合でかつ任意の方法で混合し、撹拌溶解して感光層を形成するための感光性樹脂組成物を調製することができる。例えば、各成分を、それぞれ予め溶剤に溶解させた溶液とした後、得られた溶液を所定の割合で混合して組成物を調製することもできる。以上の如くして調製した組成物は、孔径0.2μmのフィルター等を用いてろ過した後に、使用に供することもできる。
-Method of forming photosensitive layer-
The photosensitive resin composition for forming a photosensitive layer can be prepared by mixing each component and a solvent in any proportion and in any method and stirring and dissolving. For example, after preparing each solution as a solution in which each component is previously dissolved in a solvent, the resulting solution can be mixed at a predetermined ratio to prepare a composition. The composition prepared as described above can also be used after being filtered using a filter with a pore size of 0.2 μm or the like.
 感光性樹脂組成物を中間層上に塗布し、乾燥させることで、仮支持体上に感光層を有する本開示に係る感光性転写材料を得ることができる。
 塗布方法は特に限定されず、スリット塗布、スピン塗布、カーテン塗布、インクジェット塗布などの公知の方法で塗布することができる。
 なお、中間層上に後述のその他の層を形成した上に、感光層を塗布することもできる。
A photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure having a photosensitive layer on a temporary support can be obtained by applying the photosensitive resin composition onto the intermediate layer and drying it.
The coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, or ink jet coating.
In addition, after forming the other layer mentioned later on an intermediate | middle layer, a photosensitive layer can also be apply | coated.
<その他の層>
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、上記仮支持体、中間層及び感光層以外の層(以下、「その他の層」と称することがある)を有していてもよい。その他の層としては、コントラストエンハンスメント層、カバーフィルム、熱可塑性樹脂層等を挙げることができる。
<Other layers>
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may have layers other than the temporary support, the intermediate layer, and the photosensitive layer (hereinafter, may be referred to as “other layers”). Other layers include a contrast enhancement layer, a cover film, a thermoplastic resin layer and the like.
-熱可塑性樹脂層、カバーフィルム等-
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、転写性の観点から、上記仮支持体と上記中間層との間に、熱可塑性樹脂層を更に有することが好ましい。
 また、本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、上記感光層を保護する目的でカバーフィルムを有していてもよい。
 熱可塑性樹脂層の好ましい態様については特開2014-85643号公報の段落0189~段落0193、他の層の好ましい態様については特開2014-85643号公報の段落0194~段落0196にそれぞれ記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
 中でも、転写性の観点から、熱可塑性樹脂層が、アクリル樹脂及びスチレン/アクリル共重合体よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の熱可塑性樹脂を含むことが好ましい。
-Thermoplastic resin layer, cover film etc.-
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure preferably further includes a thermoplastic resin layer between the temporary support and the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of transferability.
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may have a cover film for the purpose of protecting the photosensitive layer.
Preferred embodiments of the thermoplastic resin layer are described in paragraphs 0189 to 0193 of JP-A-2014-85643, and preferred embodiments of the other layers are described in paragraphs 0194 to 0-196 of JP-A-2014-85643, respectively. The contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
Among them, from the viewpoint of transferability, the thermoplastic resin layer preferably contains at least one thermoplastic resin selected from the group consisting of an acrylic resin and a styrene / acrylic copolymer.
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料が、熱可塑性樹脂層等のその他の層を有する場合、特開2006-259138号公報の段落0094~段落0098に記載の感光性転写材料の作製方法に準じて作製することができる。
 例えば、熱可塑性樹脂層を有する本開示に係る感光性転写材料を作製する場合には、仮支持体上に、熱可塑性の有機高分子と添加剤とを溶解した溶解液(熱可塑性樹脂層用塗布液)を塗布し、乾燥させて熱可塑性樹脂層を設けた後、得られた熱可塑性樹脂層上に熱可塑性樹脂層を溶解しない溶剤に樹脂及び添加剤を加えて調製した調製液(中間層組成物)を塗布し、乾燥させて中間層を積層する。形成した中間層上に、更に、中間層を溶解しない溶剤を用いて調製した感光性樹脂組成物を塗布し、乾燥させて感光層を積層することによって、本開示に係る感光性転写材料を好適に作製することができる。
When the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has another layer such as a thermoplastic resin layer, it is produced according to the method for producing a photosensitive transfer material described in paragraph 0094 to paragraph 0098 of JP-A-2006-259138. can do.
For example, in the case of producing a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure having a thermoplastic resin layer, a solution in which a thermoplastic organic polymer and an additive are dissolved on a temporary support (for thermoplastic resin layer Coating liquid) is applied and dried to form a thermoplastic resin layer, and then a resin and an additive are added to a solvent which does not dissolve the thermoplastic resin layer on the obtained thermoplastic resin layer (intermediate liquid (intermediate) Layer composition) is applied and dried to laminate the intermediate layer. The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is preferably applied by further applying a photosensitive resin composition prepared using a solvent that does not dissolve the intermediate layer onto the formed intermediate layer, and drying and laminating a photosensitive layer. Can be produced.
-コントラストエンハンスメント層-
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、上記感光層に加え、コントラストエンハンスメント層を有することができる。
 コントラストエンハンスメント層(Contrast Enhancement Layer;CEL)は、露光前には露光波長に対する吸収が大きいが、露光されるに伴って次第に吸収が小さくなる、すなわち、光の透過率が高くなる材料(光消色性色素成分と称する)を含有する層である。光消色性色素成分としては、ジアゾニウム塩、スチルバゾリウム塩、アリールニトロソ塩類等が知られている。被膜形成成分としては、フェノール系樹脂等が用いられる。
 その他、コントラストエンハンスメント層としては、特開平6-97065号公報の段落0004~段落0051、特開平6-332167号公報の段落0012~段落0055、フォトポリマーハンドブック,フォトポリマー懇話会編,工業調査会(1989)、フォトポリマー・テクノロジー,山岡、永松編,(株)日刊工業新聞社(1988)に記載の材料を用いることができる。
-Contrast enhancement layer-
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure can have a contrast enhancement layer in addition to the photosensitive layer.
A material with a contrast enhancement layer (Contrast Enhancement Layer; CEL) that absorbs significantly to the exposure wavelength before exposure but gradually decreases as it is exposed, that is, the light transmittance increases (photo-decoloring (Referred to as a sex pigment component). As the photobleachable dye component, diazonium salts, stilbazolium salts, aryl nitroso salts and the like are known. A phenolic resin etc. are used as a film formation component.
In addition, as a contrast enhancement layer, paragraphs 0004 to 0051 of JP-A-6-97065, paragraphs 0012 to 0055 of JP-A-6-332167, a photopolymer handbook, a photopolymer conference, an industry survey 1989), Photopolymer Technology, Yamaoka, Nagamatsu ed., Nikkan Kogyo Shimbun Co., Ltd. (1988) can be used.
(樹脂パターン製造方法、及び、配線製造方法)
 本開示に係る樹脂パターン製造方法は、本開示に係る感光性転写材料を用いた樹脂パターン製造方法であれば、特に制限はないが、本開示に係る感光性転写材料における上記感光層側の最外層を支持体に貼り合わせる工程、上記感光層をパターン露光する工程、及び、パターン露光された上記感光層を現像する工程を含み、上記支持体に貼り合わせる工程の後、かつ上記感光層を現像する工程の前に、上記仮支持体を剥離する工程を含むことが好ましい。
 また、本開示に係る配線製造方法は、本開示に係る感光性転写材料を用いた配線製造方法であれば、特に制限はないが、本開示に係る感光性転写材料における上記感光層側の最外層を表面に導電層を有する支持体に貼り合わせる工程、上記感光層をパターン露光する工程、パターン露光された上記感光層を現像して樹脂パターンを形成する工程、上記樹脂パターンをマスクとして上記導電層をエッチングする工程、及び、上記樹脂パターンを剥離する工程を含み、上記支持体に貼り合わせる工程の後、かつ上記感光層を現像する工程の前に、上記仮支持体を剥離する工程を含むことが好ましい。
 なお、本開示における感光性転写材料における「感光層側の最外層」とは、仮支持体、中間層、及び、感光層をこの順で有している本開示に係る感光性転写材料での感光層側の最外層であることは言うまでもない。
 また、上記支持体を「基材」ともいい、また、上記表面に導電層を有する支持体を「基板」ともいう。
(Resin pattern manufacturing method and wiring manufacturing method)
The resin pattern production method according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited as long as it is a resin pattern production method using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, but the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is nearest to the photosensitive layer side. The process of bonding the outer layer to the support, the process of exposing the photosensitive layer to a pattern, and the process of developing the photosensitive layer subjected to the pattern exposure, and developing the photosensitive layer after the process of bonding to the support Preferably, the method further comprises the step of peeling off the temporary support.
Further, the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited as long as it is a wiring manufacturing method using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, but the most on the photosensitive layer side in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure. A step of bonding the outer layer to a support having a conductive layer on the surface, a step of pattern exposing the photosensitive layer, a step of developing the photosensitive layer subjected to the pattern exposure to form a resin pattern, the conductive using the resin pattern as a mask The process of etching a layer and the process of peeling the said resin pattern are included, The process of peeling the said temporary support after the process of bonding together to the said support and before the process of developing the said photosensitive layer Is preferred.
The “outside layer on the photosensitive layer side” in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure means a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure having the photosensitive layer in this order. Needless to say, it is the outermost layer on the photosensitive layer side.
Moreover, the said support body is also called "a base material", Moreover, the support body which has a conductive layer in the said surface is also called a "board | substrate."
 従来、感光性樹脂組成物は感光システムの違いから、活性光線を照射した部分が像として残るネガ型と、活性光線を照射していない部分を像として残すポジ型とに分けられる。ポジ型では活性光線を照射することにより、例えば活性光線を照射されて酸を発生する感光剤などを用いて露光部の溶解性を高めるため、パターン露光時点では露光部及び未露光部がいずれも硬化せず、得られたパターン形状が不良であった場合には全面露光などによって基板を再利用(リワーク)できる。そのため、いわゆるリワーク性に優れる観点からは、ポジ型が好ましい。また、残存した感光層を再度露光して異なるパターンを作製する、という技術は感光層でなければ実現できないため、本開示に係る樹脂パターン製造方法、又は、本開示に係る配線製造方法において、露光を2回以上行う態様が好ましく挙げられる。 Conventionally, the photosensitive resin composition is divided into a negative type in which a portion irradiated with an actinic ray remains as an image and a positive type in which a portion not irradiated with an actinic ray is left as an image. In the positive type, the solubility of the exposed area is enhanced by irradiating an actinic ray, for example, using a photosensitizer that emits an actinic ray to generate an acid, so that both the exposed area and the unexposed area are exposed at the pattern exposure time. In the case where the pattern shape obtained without curing is poor, the substrate can be reused (reworked) by overall exposure or the like. Therefore, from the viewpoint of so-called reworkability, a positive type is preferable. In addition, since the technique of exposing the remaining photosensitive layer again to produce different patterns can not be realized without the photosensitive layer, the resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure Preferably, the mode in which is carried out two or more times is mentioned.
<貼り合わせ工程>
 本開示に係る樹脂パターン製造方法、又は、本開示に係る配線製造方法は、本開示に係る感光性転写材料における上記感光層側の最外層を支持体、又は、表面に導電層を有する支持体に貼り合わせる工程(貼り合わせ工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 上記貼り合わせ工程では、支持体、又は、表面に導電層を備える基材に上記感光性転写材料を接触させて貼り合わせることが好ましい。
 また、上記貼り合わせ工程においては、上記導電層と、上記感光層側の最外層が接触するように圧着させることが好ましい。上記態様であると、露光及び現像後のパターン形成された感光層を、導電層をエッチングする際のエッチングレジストとして好適に用いることができる。
 上記基材と上記感光性転写材料とを圧着する方法としては、特に制限はなく、公知の転写方法、及び、ラミネート方法を用いることができる。
 具体的には例えば、上記感光性転写材料の感光層側を導電層の上に重ね、ロール等による加圧、又は、加圧及び加熱することに行われることが好ましい。貼り合わせには、ラミネータ、真空ラミネータ、及び、より生産性を高めることができるオートカットラミネーター等の公知のラミネータを使用することができる。
 上記貼り合わせ工程における圧着圧力及び温度は、特に制限はなく、貼り合せる支持体の表面の材質、例えば、導電層及び感光層の材質、搬送速度、並びに、使用する圧着機等に応じ、適宜設定することができる。また、感光性転写材料の感光層上にカバーフィルムを有する場合は、感光層からカバーフィルムを除去した後、圧着すればよい。
 上記基材が樹脂フィルムである場合、ロールツーロールでの圧着を行ってもよい。
<Lamination process>
The resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is a support having the outermost layer on the photosensitive layer side in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, or a support having a conductive layer on the surface. It is preferable that the process (lamination process) of bonding together is included.
In the bonding step, the photosensitive transfer material is preferably brought into contact with a support or a base material having a conductive layer on the surface thereof for bonding.
Further, in the bonding step, it is preferable that the conductive layer be pressure-bonded so that the outermost layer on the photosensitive layer side is in contact. According to the above aspect, the patterned photosensitive layer after exposure and development can be suitably used as an etching resist when etching the conductive layer.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a method to crimp the said base material and the said photosensitive transfer material, A well-known transfer method and the lamination method can be used.
Specifically, for example, it is preferable to overlap the photosensitive layer side of the photosensitive transfer material on the conductive layer, and to apply pressure by a roll or the like or to apply pressure and heat. For lamination, known laminators such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, and an auto-cut laminator capable of further enhancing productivity can be used.
The pressure and temperature of the pressure bonding in the bonding step are not particularly limited, and are appropriately set according to the material of the surface of the support to be bonded, for example, the materials of the conductive layer and the photosensitive layer, the transport speed, and the pressure bonding machine used. can do. When the cover film is provided on the photosensitive layer of the photosensitive transfer material, the cover film may be removed from the photosensitive layer and then pressure-bonded.
When the said base material is a resin film, you may pressure-bond by roll-to-roll.
〔支持体(基材)〕
 支持体上に複数の導電層が積層された基板は、支持体がガラス基材又はフィルム基材であることが好ましく、フィルム基材であることがより好ましい。本開示に係る配線製造方法は、タッチパネル用配線である場合、支持体がシート状樹脂組成物であることが特に好ましい。
 また、支持体は透明であることが好ましい。
 支持体の屈折率は、1.50~1.52であることが好ましい。
 支持体は、ガラス基材等の透光性基材で構成されていてもよく、コーニング社のゴリラガラスに代表される強化ガラスなどを用いることができる。また、上述の透明基材としては、特開2010-86684号公報、特開2010-152809号公報及び特開2010-257492号公報に用いられている材料を好ましく用いることができる。
 基材としてフィルム基材を用いる場合は、光学的に歪みがない基材、及び、透明度が高い基材を用いることがより好ましく、具体的な素材には、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(polyethylene terephthalate;PET)、ポリエチレンナフタレート、ポリカーボネート、トリアセチルセルロース、シクロオレフィンポリマーをあげることができる。
[Support (Base Material)]
It is preferable that a support body is a glass base material or a film base material, and, as for a substrate by which a plurality of conductive layers were laminated on a support body, it is more preferred that it is a film base material. When the wiring manufacturing method which concerns on this indication is wiring for touch panels, it is especially preferable that a support body is a sheet-like resin composition.
The support is preferably transparent.
The refractive index of the support is preferably 1.50 to 1.52.
The support may be made of a translucent base material such as a glass base material, and for example, tempered glass represented by Gorilla glass of Corning Co., Ltd. can be used. Moreover, as the above-mentioned transparent base material, materials used in JP-A-2010-86684, JP-A-2010-152809 and JP-A-2010-257492 can be preferably used.
When a film substrate is used as the substrate, it is more preferable to use a substrate having no optical distortion and a substrate having high transparency, and for specific materials, polyethylene terephthalate (PET), Examples include polyethylene naphthalate, polycarbonate, triacetyl cellulose and cycloolefin polymers.
〔導電層〕
 支持体上に形成されている複数の導電層としては、一般的な配線又はタッチパネル配線に用いられる任意の導電層を挙げることができる。
 導電層の材料としては、金属及び金属酸化物などを挙げることができる。
 金属酸化物としては、ITO(Indium Tin Oxide)、IZO(Indium Zinc Oxide)、SiO等を挙げることができる。金属としては、Al、Zn、Cu、Fe、Ni、Cr、Mo等を挙げることができる。
[Conductive layer]
As the plurality of conductive layers formed on the support, any conductive layer used for general wiring or touch panel wiring can be mentioned.
Examples of the material of the conductive layer include metals and metal oxides.
As the metal oxide, ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), IZO (Indium Zinc Oxide), may be mentioned SiO 2 and the like. Examples of the metal include Al, Zn, Cu, Fe, Ni, Cr, Mo and the like.
 本開示に係る樹脂パターン製造方法、又は、本開示に係る配線製造方法は、複数の導電層のうち少なくとも一つの導電層が金属酸化物を含むことが好ましい。
 導電層としては、静電容量型タッチパネルに用いられる視認部のセンサーに相当する電極パターン又は周辺取り出し部の配線であることが好ましい。
In the resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, it is preferable that at least one of the plurality of conductive layers includes a metal oxide.
As a conductive layer, it is preferable that it is an electrode pattern corresponded to the sensor of the visual recognition part used for an electrostatic capacitance type touch panel, or wiring of a periphery extraction part.
〔配線形成用基板〕
 本開示に用いられる配線形成用基板は、基材の表面に導電層を有する基板であることが好ましい。導電層をパターンニングすることで配線を形成する。本例では、PETなどのフィルム基材に金属酸化物や金属などの複数の導電層が設けられたものであることが好ましい。
[Wiring forming substrate]
The wiring formation substrate used in the present disclosure is preferably a substrate having a conductive layer on the surface of the base material. Wiring is formed by patterning the conductive layer. In this example, it is preferable that a plurality of conductive layers such as metal oxides and metals be provided on a film substrate such as PET.
<露光工程>
 本開示に係る樹脂パターン製造方法、又は、本開示に係る配線製造方法は、上記貼り合わせる工程後、上記感光層をパターン露光する工程(露光工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 上記露光工程では、塗膜を設けた支持体、又は、基板に所定のパターンを有するマスクを介して、活性光線を照射することが好ましい。この工程では、光酸発生剤が分解し酸が発生する。発生した酸の触媒作用により、塗膜成分中に含まれる酸分解性基が加水分解されて、酸基、例えば、カルボキシ基又はフェノール性水酸基が生成する。
 本開示において、パターンの詳細な配置及び具体的サイズは、特に限定されない。本開示において製造される回路基板を有する入力装置を備えた表示装置(例えば、タッチパネル)の表示品質を高め、また、取り出し配線の占める面積をできるだけ小さくしたいことから、パターンの少なくとも一部(特にタッチパネルの電極パターン及び取り出し配線の部分)は、100μm以下の細線であることが好ましく、70μm以下の細線であることがより好ましい。
 また、上記露光工程における露光は、マスクを介した露光でもよいし、レーザー等を用いたデジタル露光でもよいが、露光用マスクを介した露光であることが好ましい。
 本開示に係る樹脂パターン製造方法、又は、本開示に係る配線製造方法は、上記貼り合わせ工程と上記露光工程との間に、上記感光性転写材料と露光用マスクとを接触させる工程を含むことが好ましい。上記態様であると、得られるパターンの解像度により優れる。
<Exposure process>
The resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure preferably includes the step of exposing the photosensitive layer to a pattern (exposure step) after the bonding step.
In the exposure step, it is preferable to irradiate an actinic ray through a support provided with a coating or a mask having a predetermined pattern on a substrate. In this step, the photoacid generator is decomposed to generate an acid. By the catalytic action of the generated acid, the acid-degradable group contained in the coating film component is hydrolyzed to form an acid group such as a carboxy group or a phenolic hydroxyl group.
In the present disclosure, the detailed arrangement and specific size of the pattern are not particularly limited. In order to improve the display quality of a display device (for example, a touch panel) provided with an input device having a circuit board manufactured in the present disclosure and to minimize the area occupied by the extraction wiring, at least a part of the pattern (especially the touch panel) Preferably, the electrode pattern and the part of the lead-out wiring are thin lines of 100 .mu.m or less, and more preferably 70 .mu.m or less.
The exposure in the exposure step may be exposure through a mask or digital exposure using a laser or the like, but is preferably exposure through an exposure mask.
The resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure includes the step of bringing the photosensitive transfer material into contact with the exposure mask between the bonding step and the exposure step. Is preferred. It is excellent by the resolution of the pattern obtained as it is the said aspect.
 活性光線としては、可視光、紫外光、及び、電子線が挙げられるが、可視光又は紫外光が好ましく、紫外線が特に好ましい。
 活性光線による露光光源としては、低圧水銀灯、高圧水銀灯、超高圧水銀灯、ケミカルランプ、発光ダイオード(LED)光源、エキシマレーザー発生装置などを用いることができ、g線(436nm)、i線(365nm)、h線(405nm)などの波長300nm以上450nm以下の波長を有する活性光線が好ましく使用できる。また、必要に応じて長波長カットフィルター、短波長カットフィルター、バンドパスフィルターのような分光フィルターを通して照射光を調整することもできる。
 露光装置としては、ミラープロジェクションアライナー、ステッパー、スキャナー、プロキシミティ、コンタクト、マイクロレンズアレイ、レーザー露光など各種方式の露光機を用いることができる。
 露光量は、使用する感光層に応じ、適宜選択すればよいが、5mJ/cm~200mJ/cmであることが好ましく、10mJ/cm~100mJ/cmであることがより好ましい。
 また、露光後にパターンの矩形性、直線性を向上させる目的で、現像前に熱処理を行うことも好ましい。いわゆるPEB(Post Exposure Bake)と呼ばれる工程により、露光時に感光層中で生じた定在波によるパターンエッジの荒れを低減することが可能である。
As the actinic ray, visible light, ultraviolet light, and electron beam may be mentioned, and visible light or ultraviolet light is preferable, and ultraviolet light is particularly preferable.
A low pressure mercury lamp, a high pressure mercury lamp, an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp, a chemical lamp, a light emitting diode (LED) light source, an excimer laser generator etc. can be used as an exposure light source by actinic light An actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more and 450 nm or less such as h ray (405 nm) can be preferably used. In addition, it is also possible to adjust the irradiation light through a spectral filter such as a long wavelength cut filter, a short wavelength cut filter, or a band pass filter as needed.
As an exposure apparatus, various types of exposure machines such as a mirror projection aligner, a stepper, a scanner, a proximity, a contact, a microlens array, a laser exposure, and the like can be used.
Exposure dose, depending on the photosensitive layer to be used may be appropriately selected, but is preferably from 5mJ / cm 2 ~ 200mJ / cm 2, more preferably 10mJ / cm 2 ~ 100mJ / cm 2.
Further, it is also preferable to carry out heat treatment before development for the purpose of improving the rectangularity and linearity of the pattern after exposure. By means of a process called so-called PEB (Post Exposure Bake), it is possible to reduce roughness of the pattern edge due to standing waves generated in the photosensitive layer at the time of exposure.
 なお、パターン露光は、仮支持体を中間層及び感光層から剥離してから行っても、仮支持体を剥離する前に、仮支持体を介して露光し、その後、仮支持体を剥離してもよい。なお、パターン露光は、マスクを介した露光でもよいし、レーザー等を用いたデジタル露光でもよい。 Even if the pattern exposure is performed after peeling off the temporary support from the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer, exposure is performed via the temporary support before peeling off the temporary support, and then the temporary support is peeled off. May be The pattern exposure may be exposure through a mask or digital exposure using a laser or the like.
<現像工程>
 本開示に係る樹脂パターン製造方法、又は、本開示に係る配線製造方法は、上記露光する工程後の上記感光層を現像してパターンを形成する工程(現像工程)含むことが好ましい。
 また、現像工程においては、露光された部分の中間層も、露光された感光層とともに除去される。
 更に、現像工程においては、未露光部の中間層も現像液に溶解あるいは分散する形で除去されてもよい。
 上記現像工程における露光された上記感光層の現像は、現像液を用いて行うことができる。
 現像液としては、上記感光層の露光部分を除去することができれば特に制限はなく、例えば、特開平5-72724号公報に記載の現像液など、公知の現像液を使用することができる。なお、現像液は上記感光層の露光部分が溶解型の現像挙動をする現像液が好ましい。現像液としては、アルカリ水溶液が好ましく、例えば、pKa=7~13の化合物を0.05mol/L(リットル)~5mol/Lの濃度で含むアルカリ水溶液がより好ましい。現像液は、更に、水と混和性を有する有機溶剤、界面活性剤等を含有してもよい。本開示において好適に用いられる現像液としては、例えば、国際公開第2015/093271号の段落0194に記載の現像液が挙げられる。
<Development process>
The resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure preferably includes the step (developing step) of developing the photosensitive layer after the exposing step to form a pattern.
In addition, in the development step, the intermediate layer of the exposed portion is also removed together with the exposed photosensitive layer.
Furthermore, in the development step, the intermediate layer in the unexposed area may also be removed in the form of being dissolved or dispersed in the developer.
The development of the exposed photosensitive layer in the development step can be performed using a developer.
The developer is not particularly limited as long as the exposed portion of the photosensitive layer can be removed, and, for example, a known developer such as a developer described in JP-A-5-72724 can be used. The developing solution is preferably a developing solution in which the exposed portion of the photosensitive layer has a dissolution type developing behavior. The developer is preferably an alkaline aqueous solution, and more preferably an alkaline aqueous solution containing, for example, a compound having a pKa of 7 to 13 at a concentration of 0.05 mol / L (liter) to 5 mol / L. The developer may further contain an organic solvent miscible with water, a surfactant, and the like. As a developing solution preferably used in the present disclosure, for example, a developing solution described in paragraph 0194 of WO 2015/093271 can be mentioned.
 現像方式としては、特に制限はなくパドル現像、シャワー現像、シャワー及びスピン現像、ディップ現像等のいずれでもよい。ここで、シャワー現像について説明すると、露光後の感光層及び中間層に現像液をシャワーにより吹き付けることにより、露光部分を除去することができる。また、現像の後に、洗浄剤などをシャワーにより吹き付け、ブラシなどで擦りながら、現像残渣を除去することが好ましい。現像液の液温度は20℃~40℃が好ましい。
 また、露光から現像までの時間が長い態様であるほうが、本開示におけるパターン形状の変形を抑制する効果がより発揮される。露光後すぐ現像してもよいが、露光から現像までの時間が、露光から、好ましくは0.5時間以上、より好ましくは1時間以上、更に好ましく6時間以上経過した後、現像を行う態様において、本開示におけるパターン形状の変形を抑制する効果がより発揮される。
 また、本開示に係る樹脂パターン製造方法、又は、本開示に係る配線製造方法は、現像後、水等により洗浄する工程や、得られたパターンを有する支持体を乾燥する工程等、公知の工程を含んでいてもよい。
The developing method is not particularly limited, and may be any of paddle development, shower development, shower and spin development, dip development and the like. Here, to describe shower development, exposed portions can be removed by spraying a developer onto the photosensitive layer and the intermediate layer after exposure. In addition, after development, it is preferable to remove a development residue while spraying a cleaning agent or the like with a shower and rubbing with a brush or the like. The temperature of the developing solution is preferably 20 ° C to 40 ° C.
Moreover, the effect of suppressing the deformation of the pattern shape in the present disclosure is more exhibited when the time from exposure to development is longer. It may be developed immediately after exposure, but in the aspect in which development is carried out after lapse of time from exposure to development of preferably 0.5 hours or more, more preferably 1 hour or more, still more preferably 6 hours or more from exposure. The effect of suppressing the deformation of the pattern shape in the present disclosure is further exerted.
In addition, the resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure includes known steps such as a step of washing with water after development and a step of drying a support having the obtained pattern. May be included.
 更に、現像して得られたパターンを加熱処理するポストベーク工程を有していてもよい。
 ポストベークの加熱は8.1kPa~121.6kPaの環境下で行うことが好ましく、50.66kPa以上の環境下で行うことがより好ましい。一方、111.46kPa以下の環境下で行うことがより好ましく、101.3kPa以下の環境下で行うことが特に好ましい。
 ポストベークの温度は、80℃~250℃であることが好ましく、110℃~170℃であることがより好ましく、130℃~150℃であることが特に好ましい。
 ポストベークの時間は、1分間~30分間であることが好ましく、2分間~10分間であることがより好ましく、2分間~4分間であることが特に好ましい。
 ポストベークは、空気環境下で行っても、窒素置換環境下で行ってもよい。
Furthermore, it may have a post-baking step of subjecting the pattern obtained by development to heat treatment.
Post-baking heating is preferably performed under an environment of 8.1 kPa to 121.6 kPa, and more preferably performed under an environment of 50.66 kPa or more. On the other hand, it is more preferable to carry out under an environment of 111.46 kPa or less, and it is particularly preferable to carry out under an environment of 101.3 kPa or less.
The post-baking temperature is preferably 80 ° C. to 250 ° C., more preferably 110 ° C. to 170 ° C., and particularly preferably 130 ° C. to 150 ° C.
The post-baking time is preferably 1 minute to 30 minutes, more preferably 2 minutes to 10 minutes, and particularly preferably 2 minutes to 4 minutes.
Post-baking may be performed in an air environment or in a nitrogen-substituted environment.
 本開示に係る樹脂パターン製造方法、又は、本開示に係る配線製造方法における各工程時における上記支持体の搬送速度は、特に制限はないが、露光時を除いて、0.5m/min~10m/minであることが好ましく、露光時を除いて、2.0m/min~8.0m/minであることがより好ましい。 Although there are no particular limitations on the transport speed of the support at each step in the resin pattern production method according to the present disclosure or the wiring production method according to the present disclosure, it is 0.5 m / min to 10 m except during exposure. / Min is preferable, and 2.0 m / min to 8.0 m / min is more preferable except at the time of exposure.
<剥離工程>
 本開示に係る樹脂パターン製造方法、又は、本開示に係る配線製造方法は、上記支持体に貼り合わせる工程の後、かつ上記感光層を現像する工程の前に、上記仮支持体を剥離する工程(剥離工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 本開示に係る樹脂パターン製造方法、又は、本開示に係る配線製造方法は、上記中間層を有する感光性転写材料を用いるため、感光性転写材料を貼り合わせた後、かつ現像前のどのタイミングで仮支持体を剥離しても、中間層と感光層との密着性に優れるため、中間層の一部剥がれ等の不良原因が生じることが抑制され、パターン形成を良好に行うことができる。
 また、本開示に係る樹脂パターン製造方法、又は、本開示に係る配線製造方法は、パターン形成性及び解像度の観点から、上記支持体に貼り合わせる工程の後、かつ上記感光層をパターン露光する工程の前に、上記仮支持体を剥離する工程を含むことがより好ましい。更に、上記態様であると、マスクを接触させてパターン露光する場合に、感光層とマスクとが直接触れないため、パターン形成性及び解像度により優れる。
 上記剥離工程における仮支持体を剥離する方法は、特に制限はなく、公知の方法により剥離すればよい。
<Peeling process>
The method for producing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method for producing a wiring according to the present disclosure includes the step of peeling the temporary support after the step of bonding to the support and before the step of developing the photosensitive layer. It is preferable to include a (peeling step).
The resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure uses the photosensitive transfer material having the above-mentioned intermediate layer, so that it is at any timing after laminating the photosensitive transfer material and before development. Even if the temporary support is peeled off, since the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer is excellent, the occurrence of defects such as partial peeling of the intermediate layer can be suppressed, and pattern formation can be favorably performed.
Further, in the resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, from the viewpoint of pattern formability and resolution, after the step of bonding the support to the support, the step of pattern exposing the photosensitive layer It is more preferable to include the step of exfoliating the above-mentioned temporary support before. Furthermore, in the above aspect, when pattern exposure is performed by bringing a mask into contact, the photosensitive layer and the mask do not come in direct contact with each other, so the pattern formability and resolution are superior.
The method of peeling off the temporary support in the peeling step is not particularly limited, and may be peeled by a known method.
<エッチング工程>
 本開示に係る配線製造方法は、上記パターンが配置されていない領域における上記導電層をエッチング処理する工程(エッチング工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 上記エッチング工程では、上記現像工程により上記感光層から形成されたパターンを、エッチングレジストとして使用し、上記導電層のエッチング処理を行う。
 上記導電層のエッチングは、特開2010-152155号公報の段落0048~段落0054等に記載の方法、公知のプラズマエッチング等のドライエッチングによる方法など、公知の方法でエッチングを適用することができる。
 例えば、エッチングの方法としては、一般的に行われている、エッチング液に浸漬するウェットエッチング法が挙げられる。ウェットエッチングに用いられるエッチング液は、エッチングの対象に合わせて酸性タイプ又はアルカリ性タイプのエッチング液を適宜選択すればよい。
 酸性タイプのエッチング液としては、塩酸、硫酸、硝酸、酢酸、フッ酸、シュウ酸、又は、リン酸等の酸性成分単独の水溶液、酸性成分と塩化第2鉄、フッ化アンモニウム、又は、過マンガン酸カリウム等の塩の混合水溶液等が例示される。酸性成分は、複数の酸性成分を組み合わせた成分を使用してもよい。
 アルカリ性タイプのエッチング液としては、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、アンモニア、有機アミン、又は、テトラメチルアンモニウムハイドロオキサイドのような有機アミンの塩等のアルカリ成分単独の水溶液、アルカリ成分と過マンガン酸カリウム等の塩の混合水溶液等が例示される。アルカリ成分は、複数のアルカリ成分を組み合わせた成分を使用してもよい。
<Etching process>
It is preferable that the wiring manufacturing method which concerns on this indication includes the process (etching process) which carries out the etching process of the said conductive layer in the area | region where the said pattern is not arrange | positioned.
In the etching step, the pattern formed from the photosensitive layer in the developing step is used as an etching resist to etch the conductive layer.
For the etching of the conductive layer, etching can be applied by a known method such as a method described in paragraph 0048 to paragraph 0054 of JP-A-2010-152155 or a dry etching method such as a known plasma etching.
For example, as a method of etching, a commonly performed wet etching method in which the substrate is immersed in an etching solution can be mentioned. The etching solution used for wet etching may be appropriately selected from acid type or alkaline type etching solution in accordance with the object of etching.
As an acid type etching solution, an aqueous solution of only an acidic component such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, acetic acid, hydrofluoric acid, oxalic acid or phosphoric acid, an acidic component and ferric chloride, ammonium fluoride or permanganate A mixed aqueous solution of salts such as potassium acid and the like are exemplified. An acidic component may use the component which combined the several acidic component.
As an alkaline type etching solution, an aqueous solution of only an alkaline component such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia, an organic amine, or a salt of an organic amine such as tetramethyl ammonium hydroxide, an alkaline component and potassium permanganate And the like. As the alkali component, a component obtained by combining a plurality of alkali components may be used.
 エッチング液の温度は特に限定されないが、45℃以下であることが好ましい。本開示において、エッチングマスク(エッチングパターン)として使用されるパターンは、45℃以下の温度域における酸性及びアルカリ性のエッチング液に対して特に優れた耐性を発揮することが好ましい。したがって、エッチング工程中に上記パターンが剥離することが防止され、上記パターンの存在しない部分が選択的にエッチングされることになる。 The temperature of the etching solution is not particularly limited, but is preferably 45 ° C. or less. In the present disclosure, a pattern used as an etching mask (etching pattern) preferably exhibits particularly excellent resistance to an acidic and alkaline etching solution in a temperature range of 45 ° C. or less. Therefore, the peeling of the pattern during the etching process is prevented, and the portion where the pattern does not exist is selectively etched.
 上記エッチング工程後、工程ラインの汚染を防ぐために、必要に応じて、エッチングされた上記導電層を有する支持体を洗浄する工程(洗浄工程)、及び、エッチングされた上記導電層を有する支持体を乾燥する工程(乾燥工程)を行ってもよい。洗浄工程については、例えば常温(10℃~35℃)で純水により10秒~300秒間基板を洗浄することが挙げられる。乾燥工程については、例えばエアブローを使用し、エアブロー圧(0.1kg/cm~5kg/cm程度)を適宜調整して乾燥を行えばよい。 After the etching step, in order to prevent the contamination of the process line, a step of washing the support having the etched conductive layer (washing step), if necessary, and a support having the etched conductive layer You may perform the process (drying process) to dry. For the cleaning step, for example, the substrate may be cleaned with pure water at normal temperature (10 ° C. to 35 ° C.) for 10 seconds to 300 seconds. For the drying step, for example, air blow may be used, and the air blow pressure (about 0.1 kg / cm 2 to 5 kg / cm 2 ) may be appropriately adjusted to perform drying.
<エッチングレジスト剥離工程>
 本開示に係る配線製造方法は、上記エッチング工程の後に、上記感光層を剥離液を用いて剥離する工程(エッチングレジスト剥離工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 上記エッチング工程の終了後、パターン形成された上記感光層が残存している。上記感光層が不要であれば、残存する全ての上記感光層を除去すればよい。
 剥離液を用いて剥離する方法としては、例えば、好ましくは30℃~80℃、より好ましくは50℃~80℃にて撹拌中の剥離液に上記感光層などを有する基材を5分~30分間浸漬する方法が挙げられる。
 剥離液としては、例えば、水酸化ナトリウム若しくは水酸化カリウム等の無機アルカリ成分、又は、第三級アミン若しくは第四級アンモニウム塩等の有機アルカリ成分を、水、ジメチルスルホキシド、N-メチルピロリドン、又は、これらの混合溶液に溶解させた剥離液が挙げられる。剥離液を使用し、スプレー法、シャワー法、又は、パドル法等により剥離してもよい。
<Etching resist peeling process>
It is preferable that the wiring manufacturing method which concerns on this indication includes the process (etching resist peeling process) which peels the said photosensitive layer using peeling liquid after the said etching process.
After completion of the etching process, the patterned photosensitive layer remains. If the photosensitive layer is unnecessary, all remaining photosensitive layers may be removed.
As a method for peeling using a peeling solution, for example, the substrate having the above-mentioned photosensitive layer or the like is preferably added to the peeling solution during stirring at preferably 30 ° C. to 80 ° C., more preferably 50 ° C. to 80 ° C. A method of soaking for a minute may be mentioned.
As the peeling solution, for example, an inorganic alkali component such as sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide, or an organic alkali component such as a tertiary amine or a quaternary ammonium salt, water, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, or And stripping solutions dissolved in these mixed solutions. A peeling solution may be used, and peeling may be performed by a spray method, a shower method, a paddle method, or the like.
 また、本開示に係る配線製造方法は、必要に応じ、露光工程、現像工程及びエッチング工程を2回以上繰り返してもよい。
 本開示における露光工程、現像工程及びその他の工程の例としては、特開2006-23696号公報の段落0035~段落0051に記載の方法を、本開示においても好適に用いることができる。
In addition, in the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, the exposure step, the developing step, and the etching step may be repeated twice or more as necessary.
As examples of the exposure step, the development step and other steps in the present disclosure, the methods described in paragraphs 0035 to 0051 of JP-A-2006-23696 can be suitably used in the present disclosure.
 本開示に係る樹脂パターン製造方法、又は、本開示に係る配線製造方法は、他の任意の工程を含んでもよい。例えば、以下のような工程が挙げられるが、これらの工程に限定されない。 The resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may include other arbitrary steps. For example, although the following processes are mentioned, it is not limited to these processes.
<可視光線反射率を低下させる工程>
 本開示に係る配線製造方法は、導電層の表面、例えば、支持体上に有する導電層の一部又は全ての表面の可視光線反射率を低下させる処理をする工程を含むことが可能である。
 可視光線反射率を低下させる処理としては、酸化処理などを挙げることができる。例えば、銅を酸化処理して酸化銅とすることで、黒化することにより、可視光線反射率を低下させることができる。
 可視光線反射率を低下させる処理の好ましい態様については、特開2014-150118号公報の段落0017~段落0025、並びに、特開2013-206315号公報の段落0041、段落0042、段落0048及び段落0058に記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<Step of reducing visible light reflectance>
The wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure can include the step of reducing the visible light reflectance of the surface of the conductive layer, for example, part or all of the surface of the conductive layer provided on the support.
An oxidation process etc. can be mentioned as a process which reduces the visible light reflectance. For example, by oxidizing copper to form copper oxide, the visible light reflectance can be reduced by blackening.
About the preferable aspect of the process to which the visible light reflectance is reduced, Paragraph 0017-Paragraph 0025 of Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2014-150118, and Paragraph 0041, Paragraph 0042, Paragraph 0048 and Paragraph 0058 of Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-206315. The contents of this publication are incorporated herein by reference.
<エッチングされた上記導電層を有する支持体上に絶縁膜を形成する工程、及び、絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程>
 本開示に係る配線製造方法は、上記導電層を有する支持体上、例えば、形成した配線(エッチングされた上記導電層)上に絶縁膜を形成する工程と、絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程とを含むことも好ましい。
 絶縁膜を形成する工程については、特に制限はなく、公知の永久膜を形成する方法を挙げることができる。また、絶縁性を有する感光性材料を用いて、フォトリソグラフィにより所望のパターンの絶縁膜を形成してもよい。
 絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程については、特に制限はない。導電性を有する感光性材料を用いて、フォトリソグラフィにより所望のパターンの新たな導電層を形成してもよい。
<Step of Forming Insulating Film on Support Having Etched Conductive Layer, and Step of Forming New Conductive Layer on Insulating Film>
In the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, a step of forming an insulating film on the support having the conductive layer, for example, on the formed wiring (the conductive layer etched), and a new conductive layer on the insulating film It is also preferable to include the forming step.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular about the process of forming an insulating film, The method of forming a well-known permanent film can be mentioned. Alternatively, an insulating film with a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having an insulating property.
There is no particular limitation on the step of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film. A photosensitive material having conductivity may be used to form a new conductive layer of a desired pattern by photolithography.
 また、本開示に係る配線製造方法は、上記新たな導電層を、上記と同様な方法によりエッチングレジストを形成してエッチングしてもよいし、別途、公知の方法によりエッチングしてもよい。
 本開示に係る配線製造方法により得られる配線基板は、上記基板上に1層のみの配線を有していても、2層以上の配線を有していてもよい。
In the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, the new conductive layer may be etched by forming an etching resist by the same method as described above, or may be separately etched by a known method.
The wiring substrate obtained by the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may have a wiring of only one layer or a wiring of two or more layers on the substrate.
 また、本開示に係る配線製造方法は、支持体が両方の表面にそれぞれ複数の導電層を有し、支持体の両方の表面に形成された導電層に対して逐次又は同時に回路形成することも好ましい。このような構成により、支持体の一方の表面に第一の導電パターン(第一の配線)、もう一方の表面に第二の導電パターン(第二の配線)を形成した配線、好ましくはタッチパネル用配線を形成することができる。 In the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, the support may have a plurality of conductive layers on both surfaces respectively, and circuits may be sequentially or simultaneously formed on the conductive layers formed on both surfaces of the support. preferable. Wiring having a first conductive pattern (first wiring) formed on one surface of the support and a second conductive pattern (second wiring) formed on the other surface by such a configuration, preferably for a touch panel Wiring can be formed.
(配線及び配線基板)
 本開示に係る配線は、本開示に係る配線製造方法により製造された配線である。また、上記配線としては、回路配線が好ましく挙げられる。
 本開示に係る配線基板は、本開示に係る配線製造方法により製造された配線を有する基板である。
 本開示に係る配線基板の用途は限定されないが、例えば、タッチパネル用配線基板であることが好ましい。
(Wiring and wiring board)
The wiring according to the present disclosure is a wiring manufactured by the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure. Moreover, as said wiring, a circuit wiring is mentioned preferably.
The wiring substrate according to the present disclosure is a substrate having a wiring manufactured by the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure.
Although the use of the wiring board which concerns on this indication is not limited, For example, it is preferable that it is a wiring board for touch panels.
(入力装置及び表示装置)
 本開示に係る配線製造方法により製造される配線を備えた装置として、入力装置が挙げられる。
 本開示に係る入力装置は、本開示に係る配線製造方法により製造される配線を少なくとも有する入力装置であればよく、静電容量型タッチパネルであることが好ましい。
 本開示に係る表示装置は、本開示に係る入力装置を備えることが好ましい。本開示に係る表示装置は、有機EL表示装置、及び、液晶表示装置等の画像表示装置であることが好ましい。
(Input device and display device)
As an apparatus provided with the wiring manufactured by the wiring manufacturing method concerning this indication, an input device is mentioned.
The input device according to the present disclosure may be an input device having at least a wiring manufactured by the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, and is preferably a capacitive touch panel.
The display device according to the present disclosure preferably includes the input device according to the present disclosure. The display device according to the present disclosure is preferably an image display device such as an organic EL display device and a liquid crystal display device.
(タッチパネル、及び、タッチパネル表示装置)
 本開示に係るタッチパネルは、本開示に係る配線製造方法により製造された配線を少なくとも有するタッチパネルである。また、本開示に係るタッチパネルは、透明基板と、電極と、絶縁層又は保護層とを少なくとも有することが好ましい。
 本開示に係るタッチパネル表示装置は、本開示に係る配線製造方法により製造された配線を少なくとも有するタッチパネル表示装置であり、本開示に係るタッチパネルを有するタッチパネル表示装置であることが好ましい。
 本開示に係るタッチパネル及び本開示に係るタッチパネル表示装置のおける検出方法としては、抵抗膜方式、静電容量方式、超音波方式、電磁誘導方式、及び、光学方式など公知の方式いずれでもよい。中でも、静電容量方式が好ましい。
(Touch panel and touch panel display device)
The touch panel according to the present disclosure is a touch panel having at least a wiring manufactured by the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure. In addition, the touch panel according to the present disclosure preferably includes at least a transparent substrate, an electrode, and an insulating layer or a protective layer.
The touch panel display device according to the present disclosure is a touch panel display device having at least a wiring manufactured by the wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, and is preferably a touch panel display device having a touch panel according to the present disclosure.
As a detection method in the touch panel according to the present disclosure and the touch panel display device according to the present disclosure, any known methods such as a resistive film method, a capacitance method, an ultrasonic method, an electromagnetic induction method, and an optical method may be used. Among them, the capacitance method is preferable.
 タッチパネル型としては、いわゆる、インセル型(例えば、特表2012-517051号公報の図5、図6、図7、図8に記載のもの)、いわゆる、オンセル型(例えば、特開2013-168125号公報の図19に記載のもの、特開2012-89102号公報の図1や図5に記載のもの)、OGS(One Glass Solution)型、TOL(Touch-on-Lens)型(例えば、特開2013-54727号公報の図2に記載のもの)、その他の構成(例えば、特開2013-164871号公報の図6に記載のもの)、各種アウトセル型(いわゆる、GG、G1・G2、GFF、GF2、GF1、G1Fなど)を挙げることができる。 As a touch panel type, a so-called in-cell type (for example, those shown in FIGS. 5, 6, 7 and 8 of JP-A-2012-517051), a so-called on-cell type (for example, JP-A 2013-168125) 19 described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-89102, and those described in FIG. 1 and FIG. 5 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-89102, OGS (One Glass Solution) type, TOL (Touch-on-Lens) type (e.g. 2 of 2013-54727, other configurations (for example, the one described in FIG. 6 of JP-A-2013-164871), various out-cell types (so-called GG, G1 · G2, GFF, GF2, GF1, G1F etc. can be mentioned.
 本開示に係るタッチパネル及び本開示に係るタッチパネル表示装置としては、“最新タッチパネル技術”(2009年7月6日、(株)テクノタイムズ社発行)、三谷雄二監修、“タッチパネルの技術と開発”(2004年12月、シーエムシー出版)、FPD International 2009 Forum T-11講演テキストブック、Cypress Semiconductor Corporation アプリケーションノートAN2292等に開示されている構成を適用することができる。 As the touch panel according to the present disclosure and the touch panel display device according to the present disclosure, “the latest touch panel technology” (issued on July 6, 2009, Techno Times Inc.), supervised by Yuji Mitani, “the touch panel technology and development” (the The configurations disclosed in December 2004, CMC Publishing Co., Ltd., FPD International 2009 Forum T-11 Lecture Text Book, Cypress Semiconductor Corporation Application Note AN2292 and the like can be applied.
 以下に実施例を挙げて本発明の実施形態を更に具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、及び、処理手順等は、本発明の実施形態の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更することができる。したがって、本発明の実施形態の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されない。なお、特に断りのない限り、「部」、「%」は質量基準である。 Hereinafter, the embodiments of the present invention will be more specifically described by way of examples. The materials, amounts used, proportions, treatment contents, treatment procedures and the like shown in the following examples can be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of the embodiment of the present invention. Accordingly, the scope of the embodiments of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below. In addition, unless there is particular notice, "part" and "%" are mass references.
(実施例1)
<中間層形成用組成物1の作製>
 以下の処方で中間層形成用組成物1を作製した。
・蒸留水:13.4部
・メタノール:75.6部
・ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロース(商品名:TC-5、信越化学工業(株)製):
4.1部
・スノーテックスO(シリカ粒子、日産化学工業(株)製、平均粒子径12nm):68.5部
Example 1
<Preparation of Composition 1 for Forming Intermediate Layer>
Composition 1 for forming an intermediate layer was produced according to the following formulation.
Distilled water: 13.4 parts Methanol: 75.6 parts Hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (trade name: TC-5, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.):
4.1 parts · Snowtex O (silica particles, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd., average particle size 12 nm): 68.5 parts
<MATHF共重合体の合成>
 メタクリル酸(86g、1モル)を15℃に冷却しておき、カンファースルホン酸(4.6g、0.02モル)を添加した。その溶液に、2,3-ジヒドロフラン(71g、1モル、1.0当量)を滴下した。1時間撹拌した後に、飽和炭酸水素ナトリウム(500mL)を加え、酢酸エチル(500mL)で抽出し、硫酸マグネシウムで乾燥後、不溶物を濾過後40℃以下で減圧濃縮し、残渣の黄色油状物を減圧蒸留して沸点(bp.)54~56℃/3.5mmHg留分のメタクリル酸テトラヒドロフラン-2-イル(MATHF)125gを無色油状物として得た(収率80モル%)。
 これを用い、特開2013-61616号公報の段落0248~0249に記載の方法で以下のMATHF共重合体を合成した。得られたMATHF共重合体のゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー(GPC)により測定した重量平均分子量は、14,000であった。MATHF共重合体の構造は以下に示すとおりであった(構造式中の数値はモル比)。
<Synthesis of MATHF Copolymer>
Methacrylic acid (86 g, 1 mole) was allowed to cool to 15 ° C. and camphor sulfonic acid (4.6 g, 0.02 mole) was added. To the solution was added dropwise 2,3-dihydrofuran (71 g, 1 mole, 1.0 equivalent). After stirring for 1 hour, saturated sodium hydrogen carbonate (500 mL) is added, extraction is performed with ethyl acetate (500 mL), drying is performed with magnesium sulfate, insolubles are filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure at 40 ° C. or less. Distillation under reduced pressure gave 125 g of tetrahydrofuran-2-yl methacrylate (MATHF) having a boiling point (bp.) Of 54 to 56 ° C./3.5 mmHg fraction as a colorless oil (yield: 80 mol%).
Using this, the following MATHF copolymers were synthesized by the method described in paragraphs 0248 to 0249 of JP 2013-61616A. The weight average molecular weight of the obtained MATHF copolymer measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) was 14,000. The structure of the MATHF copolymer was as shown below (the numerical values in the structural formula are molar ratios).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
<感光性樹脂組成物1の作製>
 下記組成となるように各成分を混合して感光性樹脂組成物1を作製した。
・MATHF共重合体:93.9部
・光酸発生剤(下記PAG-1):5.0部
・界面活性剤(下記界面活性剤1):0.1部
・添加剤(下記添加剤1):1.0部
・PGMEA:900部
<Preparation of Photosensitive Resin Composition 1>
Each component was mixed so that it might become the following composition, and the photosensitive resin composition 1 was produced.
MATHF copolymer: 93.9 parts Photoacid generator (following PAG-1): 5.0 parts Surfactant (following surfactant 1): 0.1 parts Additive (following additive 1) ): 1.0 part, PGMEA: 900 parts
 PAG-1:下記構造の化合物A-1
 界面活性剤1:F-554、パーフルオロアルキル基含有ノニオン系界面活性剤(DIC(株)製)
 添加剤1:(N-シクロヘキシル-N’-[2-(4-モルホリニル)エチル]チオ尿素、略称:CHMETU)
PAG-1: Compound A-1 of the following structure
Surfactant 1: F-554, a perfluoroalkyl group-containing nonionic surfactant (manufactured by DIC Corporation)
Additive 1: (N-cyclohexyl-N '-[2- (4-morpholinyl) ethyl] thiourea, abbreviated as CHMETU)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
<感光性転写材料の作製>
 厚さ50μmのポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)フィルム(仮支持体1)の上に、中間層形成用組成物1を乾燥膜厚2.0μmとなるようにスリットコートし100℃のコンベクションオーブンで2分間乾燥させた。次に感光性樹脂組成物1を、この中間層上に、スリット状ノズルを用いて乾燥膜厚が3.0μmとなるように塗布した。その後、100℃のコンベクションオーブンで2分間乾燥させ、最後に保護フィルムとしてポリエチレンフィルム(トレデガー社製、OSM-N)を圧着してドライフィルムレジストを作製した。得られたドライフィルムレジストを実施例1のドライフィルムレジスト(感光性転写材料)とした。
<Preparation of photosensitive transfer material>
Composition 1 for forming an intermediate layer was slit coated on a 50 μm thick polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film (provisional support 1) so as to have a dry film thickness of 2.0 μm, and dried in a 100 ° C. convection oven for 2 minutes I did. Next, photosensitive resin composition 1 was applied onto this intermediate layer using a slit nozzle so that the dry film thickness would be 3.0 μm. Thereafter, it was dried in a convection oven at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes, and finally a polyethylene film (manufactured by Tredegar, OSM-N) was pressure-bonded as a protective film to prepare a dry film resist. The obtained dry film resist was used as the dry film resist (photosensitive transfer material) of Example 1.
(実施例2~11及び14~17)
 表1に記載の組成の中間層形成用組成物を用い、表1に記載の体積分率及び膜厚となるように中間層を形成した以外は、実施例1と同様にして実施例2~11及び14~17の感光性転写材料をそれぞれ作製した。
(Examples 2 to 11 and 14 to 17)
Example 2 to Example 2 in the same manner as Example 1 except that the composition for forming an intermediate layer having the composition described in Table 1 was used, and the intermediate layer was formed to have the volume fraction and the film thickness described in Table 1. 11 and 14 to 17 photosensitive transfer materials were prepared, respectively.
(実施例12)
 感光性樹脂組成物1の代わりに下記感光性樹脂組成物2を用いたこと以外は、実施例1と同様にして実施例12の感光性転写材料を得た。
(Example 12)
A photosensitive transfer material of Example 12 was obtained in the same manner as Example 1, except that the following photosensitive resin composition 2 was used instead of the photosensitive resin composition 1.
<感光性樹脂組成物2の作製>
 下記組成となるように各成分を混合して感光性樹脂組成物2を作製した。
<Preparation of Photosensitive Resin Composition 2>
Each component was mixed so that it might become the following composition, and the photosensitive resin composition 2 was produced.
-組成-
・ノボラック樹脂(メタクレゾール:パラクレゾール=30:70(質量比)、分子量5,500):79.9部
・感光剤:特開平4-22955号公報の第4頁に記載のナフトキノンジアジド(以下、NQDともいう。)化合物(1):20部
・界面活性剤(上記界面活性剤1):0.1部
・PGMEA:900部
-composition-
Novolak resin (metacresol: paracresol = 30: 70 (mass ratio), molecular weight 5, 500): 79.9 parts Photosensitive agent: Naphthoquinone diazide (described below) described on page 4 of JP-A-4-22955 And NQD.) Compound (1): 20 parts, surfactant (the above surfactant 1): 0.1 parts, PGMEA: 900 parts
(実施例13)
 感光性樹脂組成物1の代わりに下記感光性樹脂組成物3を用いたこと以外は、実施例1と同様にして実施例13の感光性転写材料を得た。
(Example 13)
A photosensitive transfer material of Example 13 was obtained in the same manner as Example 1, except that the following photosensitive resin composition 3 was used instead of the photosensitive resin composition 1.
<感光性樹脂組成物3の作製>
 以下の処方でネガ型の感光性樹脂組成物3を作製した。
・アクリル酸-メチルメタクリレート共重合体(Mw20,000、酸価130mgKOH/g):30部
・プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル:100部
・イルガキュア907(BASF社製):4.0部
・トリメチルプロパントリアクリレート:15.0部
<Preparation of Photosensitive Resin Composition 3>
A negative photosensitive resin composition 3 was produced according to the following formulation.
Acrylic acid-methyl methacrylate copolymer (Mw 20,000, acid value 130 mg KOH / g): 30 parts Propylene glycol monomethyl ether: 100 parts Irgacure 907 (manufactured by BASF): 4.0 parts Trimethylpropane triacrylate: 15.0 copies
(比較例1)
 仮支持体1の代わりに下記に示す積層型の仮支持体を用い、中間層を形成しなかった以外は、実施例1と同様にして比較例1の感光性転写材料を得た。
 積層型の仮支持体:東レ(株)製、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)の積層支持体、感光層側の層には、SiO粒子(平均粒子径500nm)を含有。
(Comparative example 1)
A photosensitive transfer material of Comparative Example 1 was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the following laminated temporary support was used instead of the temporary support 1 and the intermediate layer was not formed.
Laminated temporary support: Toray Industries Co., Ltd., a laminated support of polyethylene terephthalate (PET), and the layer on the photosensitive layer side contains SiO 2 particles (average particle diameter: 500 nm).
(比較例2)
 中間層に粒子を含有させなかった以外は、実施例1と同様にして比較例2の感光性転写材料を得た。
(Comparative example 2)
A photosensitive transfer material of Comparative Example 2 was obtained in the same manner as Example 1, except that the intermediate layer contained no particles.
(評価)
<中間層と感光層との密着性評価>
 100μmの膜厚のPET基材上に、導電層として銅を真空蒸着法で200nmの膜厚にて成膜して、回路形成基板とした。
 実施例1の感光性転写材料から保護フィルムを剥離し、銅層上に得られた感光性転写材料を100℃、1m/minの速度、線圧0.6MPaの条件でラミネートした後、仮支持体を剥離し、銅層上に感光層が積層した積層体を作製した。
 積層体の上に4.5cm×15cmに切り抜いたプリンタックC(日東電工(株)製)を貼り、テープと支持体の幅が合うように4.5cm×9cmに切り抜いた。これを(株)エーアンドデイー製テンシロン万能試験機を用いて100mm/minの剥離速度により180°剥離を行い、中間層と感光層との間の密着力を測定した。
 その際の密着力を下記評価基準に従って評価した。値が大きいほど好ましく、5~3が実用範囲である。
〔評価基準〕
  5:測定上限(22gf/cm(0.22N/cm))以上
  4:5.0gf/cm(0.098N/cm)以上22.0gf/cm未満
  3:2.0gf/cm(0.049N/cm)以上10.0gf/cm未満
  2:2.0gf/cm未満
  1:支持体剥離時に中間層も剥離したため評価不能
(Evaluation)
<Evaluation of adhesion between interlayer and photosensitive layer>
Copper was deposited as a conductive layer to a film thickness of 200 nm by a vacuum evaporation method on a PET substrate having a film thickness of 100 μm, to obtain a circuit formation substrate.
The protective film is peeled off from the photosensitive transfer material of Example 1, and the photosensitive transfer material obtained on the copper layer is laminated at 100 ° C., a speed of 1 m / min, a linear pressure of 0.6 MPa, and temporarily supported. The body was peeled off to prepare a laminate in which a photosensitive layer was laminated on a copper layer.
Printerac C (manufactured by Nitto Denko Corp.) cut into 4.5 cm × 15 cm was stuck on the laminate, and cut into 4.5 cm × 9 cm so that the width of the tape and the support matched. The resultant was subjected to 180 ° peeling at a peeling speed of 100 mm / min using a Tensilon universal tester made by A & D Co., and the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer was measured.
The adhesion at that time was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. The larger the value, the better, and 5 to 3 is a practical range.
〔Evaluation criteria〕
5: Measurement upper limit (22 gf / cm (0.22 N / cm)) or more 4: 5.0 gf / cm (0.098 N / cm) or more and less than 22.0 gf / cm 3: 2.0 gf / cm (0.049 N / cm) or more and less than 10.0 gf / cm 2: less than 2.0 gf / cm 1: Since the interlayer was also exfoliated at the time of exfoliation of the support
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000016
 表1から、実施例の感光性転写材料は、比較例の感光性転写材料に比べ、中間層と感光層との密着性に優れることがわかる。 It is understood from Table 1 that the photosensitive transfer material of the example is excellent in the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer as compared with the photosensitive transfer material of the comparative example.
 なお、表1に記載の粒子の平均粒子径は、算術平均粒子径であり、上述した測定方法により測定したものである。
 表1に記載の「レジスト」欄に記載のA~Cは、Aの場合、感光性転写材料における感光層が、化学増幅ポジ型レジスト層であることを表し、Bの場合、感光性転写材料における感光層が、NQDを含有するポジ型レジスト層であることを表し、Cの場合、感光性転写材料における感光層が、ネガ型レジスト層であることを表す。
 また、上述した以外の表1に記載の粒子の詳細は、以下の通りである。
 SiO(平均粒子径50nm):シリカ粒子、日産化学工業(株)製スノーテックス XL、算術平均粒子径50nm
 SiO(平均粒子径100nm):シリカ粒子、日産化学工業(株)製スノーテックス MP-1040、算術平均粒子径100nm
 SiO(平均粒子径200nm):シリカ粒子、日産化学工業(株)製スノーテックス MP-2040、算術平均粒子径200nm
 SiO(平均粒子径300nm):シリカ粒子、日産化学工業(株)製スノーテックス MP-3040、算術平均粒子径300nm
 TiO(平均粒子径20nm):酸化チタン粒子、石原産業(株)製STS-21、算術平均粒子径20nm
 ZrO(平均粒子径42nm):酸化ジルコニウム粒子、日産化学工業(株)製ナノユース ZR-20AS、算術平均粒子径42nm
 PMMA(平均粒子径40nm):ポリメチルメタクリレート粒子、日本触媒(株)製エポスター MX030W、算術平均粒子径40nm
 PVA:ポリビニルアルコール、クラレ(株)製クラレポバール PVA205
In addition, the average particle diameter of the particle | grains described in Table 1 is an arithmetic mean particle diameter, and is measured by the measuring method mentioned above.
A to C described in the “Resist” column in Table 1 indicate that the photosensitive layer in the photosensitive transfer material is a chemically amplified positive resist layer in the case of A, and in the case of B, the photosensitive transfer material In the case of C, it represents that the photosensitive layer in the photosensitive transfer material is a negative resist layer.
In addition, the details of the particles described in Table 1 other than those described above are as follows.
SiO 2 (average particle diameter 50 nm): silica particles, Nissan Chemical Industries Ltd. Snowtex XL, arithmetic average particle diameter 50 nm
SiO 2 (average particle size 100 nm): silica particles, Snowtex MP-1040 manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd., arithmetic average particle size 100 nm
SiO 2 (average particle size 200 nm): silica particles, Snowtex MP-2040 manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd., arithmetic average particle size 200 nm
SiO 2 (average particle size 300 nm): silica particles, Snowtex MP-3040 manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd., arithmetic average particle size 300 nm
TiO 2 (average particle size 20 nm): titanium oxide particles, SST-21 manufactured by Ishihara Sangyo Co., Ltd., arithmetic average particle size 20 nm
ZrO 2 (average particle size 42 nm): Zirconium oxide particles, Nanouse ZR-20AS manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd., arithmetic average particle size 42 nm
PMMA (average particle size 40 nm): Polymethyl methacrylate particles, EPOLER MX030W manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd., arithmetic average particle size 40 nm
PVA: polyvinyl alcohol, Kuraray Co., Ltd. Kuraray Poval PVA 205
(実施例18)
<中間層A形成用組成物18及び中間層B形成用組成物18の作製>
 表2に記載の組成、及び、表2に記載の体積分率となるように、実施例1と同様な方法により、中間層A形成用組成物18(以下、2層の中間層のうち、仮支持体側に設けた層を、中間層Aともいう。)、及び、中間層B形成用組成物18(以下、2層の中間層のうち、感光層側に設けた層を、中間層Bともいう。)をそれぞれ調製した。
(Example 18)
<Preparation of Composition 18 for Forming Intermediate Layer A and Composition 18 for Forming Intermediate Layer B>
Composition 18 for forming intermediate layer A (hereinafter referred to as “interlayer of two layers”) by the same method as in Example 1 so as to obtain the composition described in Table 2 and the volume fraction described in Table 2 The layer provided on the temporary support side is also referred to as an intermediate layer A), and the composition 18 for forming an intermediate layer B (hereinafter, the layer provided on the photosensitive layer side among the two intermediate layers) is referred to as an intermediate layer B. Also referred to are each prepared.
<感光性転写材料の作製>
 厚さ50μmのポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)フィルム(仮支持体1)の上に、中間層A形成用組成物18を乾燥膜厚2.0μmとなるようにスリットコートし、100℃のコンベクションオーブンで2分間乾燥させ、中間層Aを形成した。次に中間層B形成用組成物18を乾燥膜厚2.0μmとなるようにスリットコートし100℃のコンベクションオーブンで2分間乾燥させ、中間層Bを形成した。次に感光性樹脂組成物1を、この中間層上に、スリット状ノズルを用いて乾燥膜厚が3.0μmとなるように塗布した。その後、100℃のコンベクションオーブンで2分間乾燥させ、最後に保護フィルムとしてポリエチレンフィルム(トレデガー社製、OSM-N)を圧着してドライフィルムレジストを作製した。得られたドライフィルムレジストを実施例18のドライフィルムレジスト(感光性転写材料)とした。
 得られた実施例18の感光性転写材料を用い、実施例1と同様にして、密着性評価を行った。評価結果を表2に示す。
<Preparation of photosensitive transfer material>
Composition 18 for forming intermediate layer A was slit coated on a 50 μm thick polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film (provisional support 1) so as to have a dry film thickness of 2.0 μm, and 2 in a 100 ° C. convection oven. It was allowed to dry for a minute to form an intermediate layer A. Next, the composition 18 for forming an intermediate layer B was slit-coated so as to have a dry film thickness of 2.0 μm and dried in a 100 ° C. convection oven for 2 minutes to form an intermediate layer B. Next, photosensitive resin composition 1 was applied onto this intermediate layer using a slit nozzle so that the dry film thickness would be 3.0 μm. Thereafter, it was dried in a convection oven at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes, and finally a polyethylene film (manufactured by Tredegar, OSM-N) was pressure-bonded as a protective film to prepare a dry film resist. The obtained dry film resist was used as the dry film resist (photosensitive transfer material) of Example 18.
The adhesion evaluation was performed in the same manner as in Example 1 using the obtained photosensitive transfer material of Example 18. The evaluation results are shown in Table 2.
(実施例19~25)
 表2に記載の中間層A及び中間層Bの組成となる中間層A形成用組成物及び中間層B形成用組成物を用い、表2に記載の体積分率及び膜厚となるように実施例18と同様に、中間層A、中間層Bを形成した以外は、実施例18と同様にして、実施例19~25の感光性転写材料を作製し、それぞれ密着性を評価した。評価結果を表2に示す。
(Examples 19 to 25)
Using the composition for forming the intermediate layer A and the composition for forming the intermediate layer B having the composition of the intermediate layer A and the intermediate layer B described in Table 2, it is carried out so as to have the volume fraction and the film thickness described in Table 2. The photosensitive transfer materials of Examples 19 to 25 were produced in the same manner as in Example 18 except that the intermediate layer A and the intermediate layer B were formed in the same manner as in Example 18, and the adhesion was evaluated. The evaluation results are shown in Table 2.
(実施例26)
 感光性樹脂組成物1の代わりに下記感光性樹脂組成物2を用いたこと以外は、実施例23と同様にして実施例26の感光性転写材料を得た。
(Example 26)
A photosensitive transfer material of Example 26 was obtained in the same manner as in Example 23, except that the following photosensitive resin composition 2 was used instead of the photosensitive resin composition 1.
(実施例27)
 感光性樹脂組成物1の代わりに下記感光性樹脂組成物3を用いたこと以外は、実施例23と同様にして実施例27の感光性転写材料を得た。
(Example 27)
A photosensitive transfer material of Example 27 was obtained in the same manner as in Example 23, except that the following photosensitive resin composition 3 was used instead of the photosensitive resin composition 1.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000017
 表2に記載のバインダー及び粒子の詳細は、以下の通りである。
 HMPC:ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロース(商品名:TC-5、信越化学工業(株)製)
 PVA:ポリビニルアルコール(商品名:クラレホバールPVA205、クラレ(株)製)
 HPC:ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース(商品名:HPC-SSL、日本曹達(株)製)
 アクリル樹脂:メタクリル酸/メタクリル酸ベンジル共重合体(Mw:11,000、組成比(モル比):30/70)
 SiO(平均粒子径50nm):シリカ粒子、日産化学工業(株)製スノーテックス XL、算術平均粒子径50nm
Details of the binders and particles described in Table 2 are as follows.
HMPC: hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (trade name: TC-5, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.)
PVA: Polyvinyl alcohol (trade name: Kurare Hoval PVA 205, manufactured by Kuraray Co., Ltd.)
HPC: Hydroxypropyl Cellulose (trade name: HPC-SSL, manufactured by Nippon Soda Co., Ltd.)
Acrylic resin: methacrylic acid / benzyl methacrylate copolymer (Mw: 11,000, composition ratio (molar ratio): 30/70)
SiO 2 (average particle diameter 50 nm): silica particles, Nissan Chemical Industries Ltd. Snowtex XL, arithmetic average particle diameter 50 nm
(実施例101)
 100μm厚PET基材上に、第2層の導電層として酸化インジウムスズ(ITO)をスパッタリングで150nm厚にて成膜し、その上に第1層の導電層として銅を真空蒸着法で200nm厚にて成膜して、回路形成基板とした。
 銅層上に実施例1で作製した感光性転写材料をラミネートした(線圧0.8MPa、線速度3.0m/min、ロール温度90℃)。仮支持体を剥離せずに一方向に導電層パッドが連結された構成を持つ図2に示すパターン(以下、「パターンA」とも称する。)を設けたフォトマスクを用いてコンタクトパターン露光した。
 なお、図2に示すパターンAは、実線部SL及びグレー部Gが遮光部であり、点線部DLはアライメント合わせの枠を仮想的に示したものである。
 その後仮支持体を剥離し、現像、水洗を行ってパターンAを得た。次いで銅エッチング液(関東化学(株)製Cu-02)を用いて銅層をエッチングした後、ITOエッチング液(関東化学(株)製ITO-02)を用いてITO層をエッチングすることで、銅(実線部SL)とITO(グレー部G)とが共にパターンAで描画された基板を得た。
(Example 101)
Indium tin oxide (ITO) is deposited by sputtering as a conductive layer of the second layer on a 100 μm-thick PET substrate to a thickness of 150 nm by sputtering, and copper is deposited thereon by a vacuum evaporation method to a thickness of 200 nm as a conductive layer of the first layer. The film formation was performed to form a circuit formation substrate.
The photosensitive transfer material prepared in Example 1 was laminated on the copper layer (linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min, roll temperature 90 ° C.). The contact pattern was exposed using a photomask provided with a pattern (hereinafter also referred to as “pattern A”) shown in FIG. 2 having a configuration in which conductive layer pads are connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support.
In the pattern A shown in FIG. 2, the solid line portion SL and the gray portion G are light shielding portions, and the dotted line portion DL virtually illustrates the alignment alignment frame.
Thereafter, the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a pattern A. Next, the copper layer is etched using a copper etching solution (Cu-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), and then the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching liquid (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.) The board | substrate with which copper (solid line part SL) and ITO (gray part G) were both drawn by the pattern A was obtained.
 次いで、アライメントを合わせた状態で図3に示すパターン(以下、「パターンB」とも称する。)の開口部を設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光し、現像、水洗を行った。
 なお、図3に示すパターンBは、グレー部Gが遮光部であり、点線部DLはアライメント合わせの枠を仮想的に示したものである。
 その後、Cu-02を用いて銅層をエッチングし、残った感光層を剥離液(10質量%水酸化ナトリウム水溶液)を用いて剥離し、配線基板を得た。
 これにより、配線基板を得た。顕微鏡で観察したところ、剥がれや欠けなどは無く、きれいなパターンであった。
Next, pattern alignment was performed using a photomask provided with an opening of a pattern shown in FIG. 3 (hereinafter, also referred to as “pattern B”) in a state where alignment is aligned, and development and water washing were performed.
In the pattern B shown in FIG. 3, the gray portion G is a light shielding portion, and the dotted line portion DL virtually illustrates the alignment alignment frame.
Thereafter, the copper layer was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive layer was peeled using a peeling solution (10 mass% aqueous sodium hydroxide solution) to obtain a wiring board.
Thus, a wiring board was obtained. When observed with a microscope, there was no peeling or chipping, and it was a beautiful pattern.
 10:仮支持体、12:中間層、14:感光層、16:カバーフィルム、100:感光性転写材料、SL:実線部、G:グレー部、DL:点線部
 
10: temporary support, 12: intermediate layer, 14: photosensitive layer, 16: cover film, 100: photosensitive transfer material, SL: solid line portion, G: gray portion, DL: dotted portion

Claims (12)

  1.  仮支持体、中間層、及び、感光層をこの順で有し、
     前記中間層が、バインダー、及び、算術平均粒子径が400nm以下である粒子を含有する
     感光性転写材料。
    Having a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive layer in this order,
    A photosensitive transfer material, wherein the intermediate layer contains a binder and particles having an arithmetic average particle diameter of 400 nm or less.
  2.  前記中間層における前記粒子の体積分率が、中間層の全体積に対し、5%~90%である請求項1に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to claim 1, wherein the volume fraction of the particles in the intermediate layer is 5% to 90% with respect to the total volume of the intermediate layer.
  3.  前記中間層の平均膜厚が、0.3μm~10μmである請求項1又は請求項2に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to claim 1 or 2, wherein an average film thickness of the intermediate layer is 0.3 μm to 10 μm.
  4.  前記中間層が含有する前記粒子が、Si、Ti及びZrよりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の元素の酸化物粒子、又は、有機粒子である請求項1~請求項3のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。 The oxide particles of at least one element selected from the group consisting of Si, Ti, and Zr, or organic particles, is contained in the intermediate layer. Photosensitive transfer material described in the above.
  5.  前記感光層が、バインダー、及び、光酸発生剤を含有する請求項1~請求項4のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the photosensitive layer contains a binder and a photoacid generator.
  6.  前記感光層に含有される前記バインダーが、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有するバインダーを含有する請求項5に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to claim 5, wherein the binder contained in the photosensitive layer contains a binder having an acid-degradable group-protected acid group.
  7.  前記感光層が、酸基を有するバインダー、重合性化合物、及び、光重合開始剤を含有する請求項1~請求項4のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the photosensitive layer contains a binder having an acid group, a polymerizable compound, and a photopolymerization initiator.
  8.  前記中間層に含有される前記バインダーが、変性セルロース樹脂を含む請求項1~請求項7のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the binder contained in the intermediate layer contains a modified cellulose resin.
  9.  前記中間層が、2層以上の層を有する請求項1~請求項8のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the intermediate layer has two or more layers.
  10.  前記中間層における2層以上の層のうち、上記感光層に最も近い層にのみ前記算術平均粒子径が400nm以下である粒子を含有する請求項9に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to claim 9, wherein among the two or more layers in the intermediate layer, particles having an arithmetic average particle diameter of 400 nm or less are contained only in the layer closest to the photosensitive layer.
  11.  請求項1~請求項10のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料における前記感光層側の最外層を支持体に貼り合わせる工程、
     前記感光層をパターン露光する工程、及び、
     パターン露光された前記感光層を現像する工程を含み、
     前記支持体に貼り合わせる工程の後、かつ前記感光層を現像する工程の前に、前記仮支持体を剥離する工程を含む
     樹脂パターン製造方法。
    A step of laminating the outermost layer on the photosensitive layer side in the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 10 to a support,
    Exposing the photosensitive layer to a pattern;
    Developing the pattern-exposed photosensitive layer;
    A method for producing a resin pattern, comprising the step of peeling off the temporary support after the step of bonding to the support and before the step of developing the photosensitive layer.
  12.  請求項1~請求項10のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料における前記感光層側の最外層を表面に導電層を有する支持体に貼り合わせる工程、
     前記感光層をパターン露光する工程、
     パターン露光された前記感光層を現像して樹脂パターンを形成する工程、
     前記樹脂パターンをマスクとして前記導電層をエッチングする工程、及び、
     前記樹脂パターンを剥離する工程を含み、
     前記支持体に貼り合わせる工程の後、かつ前記感光層を現像する工程の前に、前記仮支持体を剥離する工程を含む
     配線製造方法。
    A step of bonding the outermost layer on the photosensitive layer side of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 10 to a support having a conductive layer on the surface,
    Pattern exposing the photosensitive layer;
    Developing the photosensitive layer subjected to pattern exposure to form a resin pattern;
    Etching the conductive layer using the resin pattern as a mask;
    Including the step of peeling the resin pattern,
    A process for producing a wiring, comprising the step of peeling off the temporary support after the step of bonding to the support and before the step of developing the photosensitive layer.
PCT/JP2018/039375 2017-11-27 2018-10-23 Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, and method for producing wiring line WO2019102771A1 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2019556140A JP6999693B2 (en) 2017-11-27 2018-10-23 Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, and wiring manufacturing method
CN201880075097.9A CN111386498A (en) 2017-11-27 2018-10-23 Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, and method for producing wiring
JP2021201967A JP2022043153A (en) 2017-11-27 2021-12-13 Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, and wiring manufacturing method

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2017227035 2017-11-27
JP2017-227035 2017-11-27
JP2018-098330 2018-05-22
JP2018098330 2018-05-22

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019102771A1 true WO2019102771A1 (en) 2019-05-31

Family

ID=66631579

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2018/039375 WO2019102771A1 (en) 2017-11-27 2018-10-23 Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, and method for producing wiring line

Country Status (4)

Country Link
JP (2) JP6999693B2 (en)
CN (1) CN111386498A (en)
TW (1) TW201924935A (en)
WO (1) WO2019102771A1 (en)

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPWO2021065278A1 (en) * 2019-09-30 2021-04-08
WO2021065152A1 (en) * 2019-09-30 2021-04-08 富士フイルム株式会社 Planographic printing original plate, method for manufacturing planographic printing plate, and planographic printing method
WO2022138576A1 (en) * 2020-12-25 2022-06-30 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, method for producing circuit wiring line, method for producing electronic device, and method for producing multilayer body
CN115768838A (en) * 2020-06-26 2023-03-07 富士胶片株式会社 Composition, transfer film, method for producing laminate, method for producing circuit wiring, and method for producing electronic device
WO2023127755A1 (en) * 2021-12-27 2023-07-06 富士フイルム株式会社 Method for producing resist pattern, method for producing laminate, and photosensitive transfer material for direct imaging exposure

Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2002372788A (en) * 2001-06-13 2002-12-26 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive transfer material and method for producing color filter
JP2005266166A (en) * 2004-03-17 2005-09-29 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive transfer material and method for manufacturing printed wiring board using the same
JP2005352064A (en) * 2004-06-09 2005-12-22 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive film, permanent pattern, and method for forming the same
WO2006064884A1 (en) * 2004-12-15 2006-06-22 Kuraray Co., Ltd. Actinic energy ray curable resion composition and use thereof
JP2006268027A (en) * 2005-02-23 2006-10-05 Jsr Corp Method for manufacturing plasma display panel and transfer film
JP2006344314A (en) * 2005-06-09 2006-12-21 Fujifilm Holdings Corp Magnetic recording medium
JP2007225939A (en) * 2006-02-23 2007-09-06 Fujifilm Corp Multilayer material, resin pattern forming method, substrate, display device, and liquid crystal display device
JP2015184323A (en) * 2014-03-20 2015-10-22 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive laminate, transfer material, patterned photosensitive laminate, method for producing the same, touch panel, and image display device

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP3947008B2 (en) * 2002-01-15 2007-07-18 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive transfer material
JP3820160B2 (en) * 2002-01-23 2006-09-13 富士写真フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive transfer material and color filter
JP2017078852A (en) * 2015-10-21 2017-04-27 富士フイルム株式会社 Dry film resist, method for producing circuit wiring, circuit wiring, input device and display device

Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2002372788A (en) * 2001-06-13 2002-12-26 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive transfer material and method for producing color filter
JP2005266166A (en) * 2004-03-17 2005-09-29 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive transfer material and method for manufacturing printed wiring board using the same
JP2005352064A (en) * 2004-06-09 2005-12-22 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive film, permanent pattern, and method for forming the same
WO2006064884A1 (en) * 2004-12-15 2006-06-22 Kuraray Co., Ltd. Actinic energy ray curable resion composition and use thereof
JP2006268027A (en) * 2005-02-23 2006-10-05 Jsr Corp Method for manufacturing plasma display panel and transfer film
JP2006344314A (en) * 2005-06-09 2006-12-21 Fujifilm Holdings Corp Magnetic recording medium
JP2007225939A (en) * 2006-02-23 2007-09-06 Fujifilm Corp Multilayer material, resin pattern forming method, substrate, display device, and liquid crystal display device
JP2015184323A (en) * 2014-03-20 2015-10-22 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive laminate, transfer material, patterned photosensitive laminate, method for producing the same, touch panel, and image display device

Cited By (15)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP7389128B2 (en) 2019-09-30 2023-11-29 富士フイルム株式会社 Planographic printing plate original plate, method for preparing a planographic printing plate, and planographic printing method
JP7408675B2 (en) 2019-09-30 2024-01-05 富士フイルム株式会社 Planographic printing plate original plate, method for preparing a planographic printing plate, and planographic printing method
WO2021065278A1 (en) * 2019-09-30 2021-04-08 富士フイルム株式会社 Planographic printing plate original plate, method for manufacturing planographic printing plate, and planographic printing method
JPWO2021065152A1 (en) * 2019-09-30 2021-04-08
CN114450161A (en) * 2019-09-30 2022-05-06 富士胶片株式会社 Lithographic printing plate precursor, method for producing lithographic printing plate, and lithographic printing method
CN114531860A (en) * 2019-09-30 2022-05-24 富士胶片株式会社 Lithographic printing plate precursor, method for producing lithographic printing plate, and lithographic printing method
WO2021065152A1 (en) * 2019-09-30 2021-04-08 富士フイルム株式会社 Planographic printing original plate, method for manufacturing planographic printing plate, and planographic printing method
CN114450161B (en) * 2019-09-30 2024-04-02 富士胶片株式会社 Lithographic printing plate precursor, method for producing lithographic printing plate, and lithographic printing method
CN114531860B (en) * 2019-09-30 2024-01-30 富士胶片株式会社 Lithographic printing plate precursor, method for producing lithographic printing plate, and lithographic printing method
JPWO2021065278A1 (en) * 2019-09-30 2021-04-08
US11874602B2 (en) 2019-09-30 2024-01-16 Fujifilm Corporation Lithographic printing plate precursor, method for preparing lithographic printing plate, and lithographic printing method
CN115768838A (en) * 2020-06-26 2023-03-07 富士胶片株式会社 Composition, transfer film, method for producing laminate, method for producing circuit wiring, and method for producing electronic device
CN115768838B (en) * 2020-06-26 2024-03-15 富士胶片株式会社 Composition, transfer film, method for producing laminate, method for producing circuit wiring, and method for producing electronic device
WO2022138576A1 (en) * 2020-12-25 2022-06-30 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, method for producing circuit wiring line, method for producing electronic device, and method for producing multilayer body
WO2023127755A1 (en) * 2021-12-27 2023-07-06 富士フイルム株式会社 Method for producing resist pattern, method for producing laminate, and photosensitive transfer material for direct imaging exposure

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW201924935A (en) 2019-07-01
JPWO2019102771A1 (en) 2020-11-19
JP6999693B2 (en) 2022-01-19
CN111386498A (en) 2020-07-07
JP2022043153A (en) 2022-03-15

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2019102771A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, and method for producing wiring line
JP6683890B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material and method for manufacturing circuit wiring
KR102110818B1 (en) Method for manufacturing a substrate on which a pattern is formed, and method for manufacturing a circuit board
JP2019191518A (en) Photosensitive transfer material, production method of resist pattern and method for manufacturing circuit wiring
JP2022069472A (en) Photosensitive transfer material and its manufacturing method, manufacturing method of resin pattern, as well as, manufacturing method of circuit wiring
JPWO2020066351A1 (en) Manufacturing method of patterned base material, manufacturing method of circuit board and manufacturing method of touch panel
WO2019044138A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing same, and method for manufacturing circuit wiring
WO2019065113A1 (en) Method for manufacturing circuit wiring and method for manufacturing touch panel
JP6992097B2 (en) Resist pattern manufacturing method, circuit board manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
JP6893550B2 (en) Manufacturing method of photosensitive transfer material and circuit wiring
WO2019022089A1 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, method for producing circuit wiring, and method for producing touch panel
JP6968273B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method.
JP7011047B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing resist pattern, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, touch panel, and touch panel display device.
JP6832899B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
WO2019151534A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, manufacturing method for circuit wiring, and manufacturing method for touch panel
JP7011046B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resist pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, touch panel, and touch panel display device
JP7048332B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material and its manufacturing method, resin pattern manufacturing method, and circuit wiring manufacturing method.
WO2021024650A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer member, method for producing resin pattern, method for producing circuit wiring, and method for producing touch panel
WO2019225363A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing touch panel
WO2019077924A1 (en) Method for producing circuit board and method for producing touch panel
WO2019021622A1 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring production method, and touch panel production method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 18881763

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2019556140

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 18881763

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1